[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2016074512A1 - Illumination control method, device, and system - Google Patents

Illumination control method, device, and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016074512A1
WO2016074512A1 PCT/CN2015/086676 CN2015086676W WO2016074512A1 WO 2016074512 A1 WO2016074512 A1 WO 2016074512A1 CN 2015086676 W CN2015086676 W CN 2015086676W WO 2016074512 A1 WO2016074512 A1 WO 2016074512A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
color
target
spectrum
light
tested
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2015/086676
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
董建飞
吴海宁
张国旗
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Changzhou Institute Of Technology Research For Solid State Lighting
Original Assignee
Changzhou Institute Of Technology Research For Solid State Lighting
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201410634807.0A external-priority patent/CN104486861B/en
Priority claimed from CN201410635471.XA external-priority patent/CN104486862B/en
Priority claimed from CN201410666024.0A external-priority patent/CN104703335B/en
Priority claimed from CN201410665789.2A external-priority patent/CN104703334B/en
Application filed by Changzhou Institute Of Technology Research For Solid State Lighting filed Critical Changzhou Institute Of Technology Research For Solid State Lighting
Publication of WO2016074512A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016074512A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of illumination, and in particular to a lighting control method, apparatus and system.
  • color-adjustable light sources with red, green, blue and other color light sources mixed to produce white light are widely used in the lighting of shopping malls, supermarkets and museums.
  • goods or exhibits are usually highlighted by luminaires, and these applications have certain requirements for the color temperature of the lighting. Therefore, it is important to adjust the output light color of the color tunable light source so that the object to be tested is bright and attractive to the observer at the reference color temperature.
  • the lighting control method for increasing the vividness of the color of the object to be tested has a good application prospect in terms of commercial and art exhibitions. For example, Philips' supermarket lighting solutions adjust the color and color temperature of different products to make the food look more attractive.
  • the existing dimming technology dimming control method is simple, and simply replaces the color of the light with the color of the object to be tested, and changes the color tone of the object to be tested while improving the color saturation of the object to be tested. Or focus on improving the output light color quality of the color-adjustable light source, and controlling the light output by the light source to have a higher color rendering index or higher color accuracy, regardless of the influence of the light color on the target object, so To enhance the effect of the color of the target object.
  • the color of a human face under a high CRI luminaire may be unnatural because it does not have a high color rendering index for the skin color and does not achieve the effect of enhancing the color, so that the color of the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately enhanced.
  • the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested is distorted while increasing the color saturation of the object to be tested.
  • the prior art lighting control method uses a color sensor to obtain the color of the target object, obtains a driving light signal by calculating the color information of the target object, and adjusts the adjusted color adjustable light source according to the lighting driving signal to make the color adjustable light source
  • the illumination of the target object is performed to enhance the target color of the target object, and the color of the target object is automatically recognized to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object, but the entire process data is computationally intensive, resulting in slow processing speed.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a lighting control method, apparatus, and system to at least solve the technical problem that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • a lighting control method includes: acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and controlling illuminating body illuminating according to the dimming signal.
  • acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: receiving a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type; and using the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested to obtain a test from the memory
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object; the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body and the color coordinates of the reference light source are obtained by querying the color temperature of the reference light source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body is obtained by querying from the memory using the illuminating body spectral type, wherein the illuminating body is
  • the object to be tested provides a condensable light source; the radiant flux is calculated according to the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, and the target corresponding to the il
  • the radiant flux calculation is performed according to the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained: Calculating the color coordinates of the object under test under the reference light source; obtaining the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be measured can be achieved under the condensable light source; calculating the color coordinates of the object under the reference light source and the object to be tested The maximum saturation color coordinate that can be achieved under the reference light source, the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body, and the target saturation level of the user input establish a calculation model of the target radiation flux corresponding to the illumination body; according to the target radiation flux corresponding to the illumination body The calculation model calculates the target radiant flux.
  • acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: receiving an identification mark of the object to be detected detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; and using the identification mark to query the object to be tested from the memory
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface; the reference source spectrum is obtained from the memory using the reference source color temperature, the color coordinates of the reference source, and the color channel spectrum of the illuminator, wherein the illuminator provides a tonable source for the object to be tested; d.
  • the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator are used to calculate the radiant flux, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained; and the target radiant flux is converted into The dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminator.
  • the radiant flux calculation is performed, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained.
  • the target radiant flux calculation model calculates the target radiant flux.
  • obtaining the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: determining a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced; in a preset database.
  • Searching for dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, and controlling the illumination body illumination according to the dimming signal includes: The obtained dimming signal data is modulated to obtain a light driving signal; the lighting driving signal is used to control the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the illumination light emitted by the illumination body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object. And controlling the color temperature of the light emitted by the illuminating body is the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the preset database is obtained by: creating an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is used for calculating the radiation flux, and the radiation flux is a physical quantity indicating the radiation intensity of the illumination body; performing calculation processing on the optimization equation to obtain the radiation flux An optimal solution; obtaining dimming signal data according to an optimal solution of the radiant flux; and creating a preset database, wherein the preset database is used to store the dimming signal data.
  • an optimization equation is created by creating a target equation, wherein the target equation is a spectrum of a standard light source, a tristimulus value function of a human eye, a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, and a counter of a target color sample.
  • the rate data, the reflectance data of the target color sample, the reflectance data of the contrast color samples of the target color sample, the equations created by the relative spectra of the illuminants, and the radiant flux; and the optimization equations are created by the target equation and the constraint equation.
  • acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body includes: acquiring a color parameter of the target object; searching for a target color sample in the first preset database, wherein the target color sample is a color sample corresponding to the color parameter, wherein the first pre- Setting a color parameter corresponding to different color samples and different color samples in the database; searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset database is pre-stored corresponding to Dimming signal data of different target color samples; controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal comprises: modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; controlling the illumination of the illumination body by the driving signal of the light, wherein the driving signal of the light It is used to control the light emitted by the illuminating body to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object.
  • the color parameter of the target object is acquired by the following method, wherein the color parameter includes a plurality of color parameters including a tone value and a saturation value: acquiring an image of the target object; performing white balance processing on the image of the target object Obtaining an image of the processed target object; determining a target area in the image of the processed target object; determining a main color of the target area; determining a color component value of the main color of the target area; and converting the color component value into a hue value and Saturation value.
  • the color parameter includes a plurality of color parameters including a tone value and a saturation value: acquiring an image of the target object; performing white balance processing on the image of the target object Obtaining an image of the processed target object; determining a target area in the image of the processed target object; determining a main color of the target area; determining a color component value of the main color of the target area; and converting the color component value into a hue value and Saturation value.
  • a lighting control apparatus comprising: an acquisition total module for acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and a control total module for controlling illuminating body illumination according to the dimming signal .
  • the acquiring total module includes: a receiving module, configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectral type of the illuminating body; and a query module for using a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested
  • the memory is queried to obtain the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested;
  • the query module is further configured to use the reference source color temperature to query the reference source spectrum of the illuminant from the memory, the reference source color coordinate, and use the illuminant spectrum type to query and obtain illumination from the memory.
  • Each color channel spectrum wherein the illuminating body provides a condensable light source for the object to be tested; a calculation module for the reference light source spectrum according to the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the illuminating body
  • Each color channel spectrum is subjected to radiant flux calculation to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; and a conversion module is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body.
  • the acquiring total module includes: a receiving module, configured to receive an identifier of the object to be detected detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; and a query module, configured to use the identifier from the memory
  • the query obtains the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; the query module is also used to query the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body by using the reference source color temperature from the memory, wherein the illumination body is to be tested
  • the object provides a condensable light source; the calculation module calculates the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator to obtain an illuminating body.
  • Corresponding target radiant flux a conversion module for converting the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the il
  • the acquiring the total module includes: acquiring the total module, comprising: a determining unit, configured to determine a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced.
  • the control module includes: an obtaining unit, configured to obtain a light driving signal by the obtained dimming signal data; and a control unit configured to control the lighting body to emit light according to the lighting driving signal, wherein the lighting driver The motion signal is used to control the light emitted by the illuminating body to enhance the target color of the target object, and to control the color temperature value of the light emitted by the illuminating body as the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the acquiring the total module includes: a first acquiring unit, configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object; and a first searching unit, configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where the first pre- Setting a color parameter corresponding to a different color sample and a different color sample in the database;
  • the second searching unit is configured to search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset The dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples is prestored in the database;
  • the control total module comprises: a second acquiring unit, configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and a control unit for the light
  • the driving signal controls the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the illumination driving signal is used to control the illumination emitted by the illumination body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.
  • a lighting control system comprising: an illuminating body; and a general controller for acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body and controlling the illuminating body illuminating according to the dimming signal.
  • the total controller includes: a memory for storing each color channel spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference source color coordinate, and a reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested; and a controller for receiving the user Input reference source color temperature, reflectance type of the object to be tested, and illuminant spectrum type, use the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to query the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested; use the reference source color temperature from the memory
  • the reference light source and the reference light source color coordinate of the illumination body are obtained by querying, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body is obtained by using the illumination body spectrum type from the memory, according to the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the illumination body.
  • Each color channel spectrum is subjected to radiant flux calculation to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide the object to be tested A gradable light source.
  • the total controller includes: a memory for storing each color channel spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; and a sensor for sensing
  • the identification mark is transmitted to the controller, wherein the identification mark is associated with the object to be tested; the controller is configured to receive the identification mark of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and the reference light source color temperature and target saturation d used by the user
  • the identification mark is queried from the memory to obtain a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested;
  • the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body are obtained by using the reference light source color temperature from the memory, according to the target saturation d
  • the total controller includes: a memory, configured to store a preset database, wherein the preset database prestores dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors; and the controller is configured to receive the target light color temperature The value and the target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database,
  • the light driving signal is obtained by searching the obtained dimming signal data, and the lighting body is controlled to emit light by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used for controlling the light emitted by the lighting body to enhance the target color of the target object, and controlling the emitted by the lighting body.
  • the color temperature of the light is the color temperature value of the target light, and the illuminating body is used to provide a light source for the target object.
  • the total controller includes: a sensor for acquiring an image of the target object; and a memory for storing the preset database, wherein the preset database includes a plurality of preset databases, and the plurality of preset databases include a first preset database and a second preset database, wherein the first preset database prestores different color samples and color parameters corresponding to different color samples, and the second preset database prestores dimming corresponding to different color samples.
  • a controller configured to receive an image of the target object, determine an color parameter of the target object by using an image of the target object, search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for a second preset database
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is modulated to obtain the dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal;
  • the lighting driving signal is used to control the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the illumination target emitted by the illumination body
  • the object is such that the color of the target object is enhanced, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide a light source for the target object.
  • the purpose of quantitatively and accurately enhancing the color of the object to be tested is achieved, thereby enhancing the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the technical effect of color saturation further solves the technical problem that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a first embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing a color range of a test object under a fixed light source according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a white light region function according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5 is a flow chart of an alternative lighting control method in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a system block diagram of a method for increasing the color vividness of an object to be tested with a white light constraint according to a second embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a software interface for a user to input a reference color temperature according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 8 is data of a bag reflectance according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the spectral distribution of D65 according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a four-channel spectral distribution of a light source provided by an illuminating body according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic illustration of a color gamut of a purse under a four-channel lamp in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 12 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a color range of a third object under a fixed light source according to an embodiment of the invention.
  • Figure 14 is a block diagram showing a system for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be tested according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 15 is a flow chart of an alternative lighting control method in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of an optional user software interface in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 17 is a diagram showing the distribution of reflectance data of a purse according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 18 is a schematic diagram showing the spectral distribution of D65 according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 19 is a schematic view showing a four-channel spectral distribution of a lamp according to a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 20 is a gamut diagram of a purse under a four-channel lamp in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 21 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the color coordinates of a standard diffuse reflector and the coordinates of a target color sample according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 23 is a schematic illustration of a color temperature tolerance quadrilateral specified by the ANSI 78.377 standard in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 24 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 26 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 27 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 28 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 29 is a schematic illustration of an alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 30 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 31 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 32 is a schematic illustration of an alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 33 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 34 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 35 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 36 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 37 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 38 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 39 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • a method embodiment of a lighting control method is provided, it being noted that the steps illustrated in the flowchart of the drawings may be performed in a computer system such as a set of computer executable instructions, and Although a logical order is shown in the flowcharts, in some cases the steps shown or described may be performed in a different order than the ones described herein.
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the lighting control method includes the following steps:
  • Step S102 acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body
  • Step S104 controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:
  • Step S101 receiving a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type.
  • the user can input the color temperature of the reference light source, the reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum type of the illuminating body through the interaction device.
  • the interaction device may be a remote controller.
  • the user can use the remote controller to use the software interface. Take action.
  • Step S103 using the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested is obtained from the memory.
  • Step S105 using the reference light source color temperature to query the reference light source of the illumination body and the reference light source color coordinate, and querying the spectrum of each channel of the light source from the memory by using the illumination body spectral type, wherein the illumination body provides the light source for the object to be tested.
  • the spectrum of each channel of the light source, the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested may be pre-stored in the memory.
  • the reference color temperature input by the user in step S101 corresponds to the above memory.
  • Step S107 calculating the radiant flux according to the reference light source of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body;
  • step S109 the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.
  • each of the color channels may illuminate the object to be tested according to the target radiant white light, and the color of the object to be tested may be used to maximize the color saturation of the object and the color tone of the object to be tested around the object to be tested. Not distorted.
  • the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that the output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light.
  • the color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the object to be tested.
  • the color cannot accurately and quantitatively enhance the color saturation of the object to be tested and at the same time distort the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested.
  • step S107 the radiant flux calculation is performed according to the reference light source of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel provided by the illuminating body, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the steps of the flux can include:
  • Step S201 obtaining color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source by calculation;
  • the reference light source may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time.
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960 uv. Color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, etc.
  • CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.
  • Step S203 obtaining color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the tonable light source by calculation
  • Step S205 according to the color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • a spectrum of each channel of the light source and a target saturation level input by the user establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body
  • Step S207 calculating a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.
  • step S201 the step of obtaining the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test by the reference light source may include:
  • step S300 the tristimulus values of the color of the object under the reference light source are calculated by the following formula, which are respectively represented as X o , Y o , Z o .
  • r( ⁇ ) is the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested
  • s( ⁇ ) is the reference source spectrum. It is a CIE human eye tristimulus value function.
  • the reflectance distribution of the object can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance distribution of the object pre-existing in the memory.
  • the spectrum of the reference source uses the spectrum of a standard illuminator of different color temperatures. The color temperature is selected by the user and the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • step S2073 the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that can be achieved under the condensable light source is obtained by calculation.
  • the steps can include:
  • Step S401 obtaining color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source from the memory;
  • Step S403 according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference light source, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source, the reference light source, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the light source.
  • Channel spectrum calculation according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference light source, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source, the reference light source, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the light source.
  • FIG. 3 is a coordinate range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points R, G, and B, that is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) is the color of the object under test under the reference light source.
  • the coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source.
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source and the color coordinates of the reference source (x r , The color of all the colors on the line of y r ) is the same. The farther the color point is from the color point of the reference source, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 3, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source can be seen.
  • the color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • the level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.
  • step S205 according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
  • the spectrum of each channel of the light source and the color coordinates of the reference source establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body, and the above calculation model may include:
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total flux of all color channels is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate point of the object to be tested is on the line connecting (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ).
  • Constraint 4 The color coordinate point of the light is within the set white light area.
  • the objective equation is to minimize the weighted sum of d and total luminous flux, with the latter being optional, either added to the target equation or not.
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, and the only optimal solution that minimizes the value of the objective equation is determined by solving the mathematical optimization problem. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.
  • the second term of the objective equation can be any linear or nonlinear equation related to the radiant flux vector p.
  • the total luminous flux, light efficiency, CRI, etc. of all color channels can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • the luminous flux of each channel is equal to the luminous flux of the channel multiplied by the luminous flux converted by the radiation flux of the channel 1w.
  • the color coordinates of the object to be tested can be represented by the reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel of the illumination body, and the radiation flux vector p.
  • the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined.
  • the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.
  • Figure 3 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured in advance by the user and then input to the device.
  • the color of the light is limited to white light.
  • the ANSI C78.377 standard specifies eight quadrilaterals for eight color temperature points. We limit the color of the light to the white light area enclosed by these quadrilaterals.
  • the curve of the white light area piecewise function is shown in Fig. 4. In the CIE1931 xy coordinate system, the entire white light region is divided into two blocks, and the x-coordinates range from [x min , x mid ] and [x mid , x max ].
  • the piecewise linear fitting function of the upper limit of the white light region is:
  • the piecewise linear fit function for the lower bound of the white light region is:
  • the xy coordinate of the light color can be calculated by the following formula.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii flux of the i-th channel 1W, which is obtained by integrating the following equation.
  • k m is a constant and is 673.
  • v( ⁇ ) is the light-effect distribution of the human visual spectrum. So the total light is
  • the dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from ⁇ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the current value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the ⁇ i by the scale factor previously calibrated. The method flow described above is shown in Figure 5.
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested.
  • the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced.
  • the output light of the system is white light.
  • the spectrum of the illumination source is fully adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature, and the operation is simple. In the case where the spectrum of the light source is suitable, the effect of the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested can be accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.
  • the output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.
  • FIG. 1 A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • the user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory.
  • the reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory.
  • the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory.
  • the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source.
  • the controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the lighting fixture is measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light source uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.
  • Table 1 xy color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 7.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.
  • the optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.
  • Table 2 takes the reference light source of 6500K as an example, and gives the color color coordinates and the light color coordinates of the four objects corresponding to the objects in Table 1. Lamp PWM drive signal.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 12, the method includes:
  • Step S101 receiving an identification mark of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user.
  • the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the sensor in Embodiment 3 can be used to transmit an identification flag to the controller by sensing, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.
  • Step S103 using the identification mark to query the memory to obtain the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • Step S105 Query the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the color coordinate of the reference light source, and the color channel spectrum of the illuminating body by using the reference light source color temperature, wherein the illuminating body provides the light source for the object to be tested.
  • the memory in the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the reference input by the user in step S101 is described.
  • the color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source.
  • Step S107 calculating the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body. the amount.
  • step S109 the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.
  • each of the light source channels illuminates the object to be tested with the radiant flux, and the color of the object to be tested can satisfy the target saturation d.
  • the surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body so that under the illumination of the output light of the illuminating body,
  • the saturation of the color of the object under test light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the color of the object to be tested.
  • the problem of the color of the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately enhanced.
  • the radiant flux is calculated according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source.
  • the steps of the target radiant flux may also include:
  • Step S201 obtaining target color coordinates by calculation, wherein the target color coordinates are color coordinates presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d.
  • Step S203 a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is established according to the target color coordinate.
  • Step S205 calculating a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.
  • step S201 the step of obtaining the target color coordinate by calculation includes:
  • step S301 the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the spectrum of the reference light source are calculated.
  • the reference light source spectrum may be stored in the memory by the user in advance, or may be input into the system by the user in real time.
  • the color coordinates may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960 uv color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color. Coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, etc.
  • CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.
  • Step S303 calculating color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
  • Step S305 according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the spectrum of the reference light source, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation
  • the target color coordinate (x' o , y' o ) is calculated with the target saturation d.
  • the step of calculating the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference light source spectrum in step S301 may include:
  • step S400 the tristimulus values of the color of the object under the reference light source are calculated by the following formula, which are represented as X o , Y o , Z o , respectively.
  • r( ⁇ ) is the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested
  • s( ⁇ ) is the reference source spectrum. It is a CIE human eye tristimulus value function.
  • the reflectance distribution of the test object can be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance distribution of the test object previously stored in the memory can be used.
  • the spectrum of the reference source uses the spectrum of a standard illuminator of different color temperatures. The color temperature is selected by the user and the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • the tristimulus value XYZ of the color of the object to be tested is converted to (x o , y o ).
  • step S303 calculating a color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the condensable light source
  • the steps include:
  • Step S501 obtaining reference spectral color coordinates (x r , y r ) from the memory.
  • Step S503 according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference source spectrum, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the color channels of the light source.
  • the spectrum calculates the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source.
  • FIG. 13 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating a color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each color channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) for the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum
  • the color coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source spectrum.
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum and the color of the reference source spectrum are known. All the colors of the lines on the coordinates (x r , y r ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 13, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference light source can be seen.
  • the color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • the level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.
  • the target color coordinate ( x′o , y is calculated according to the color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test and the color coordinate of the maximum saturation and the target saturation d.
  • the steps of ' o ) may include:
  • Step S601 the target color coordinates calculated by the following equation (x 'o, y' o ),
  • d is a saturation level that can be expected by the user and can be expressed as a percentage.
  • the calculation model for establishing the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body according to the target color coordinate may include:
  • constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiation flux vector p, wherein the above constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object to be tested under the tonable light source provided by the illuminant can be matched with (x' o , y' o ).
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.
  • the target here can be any linear or nonlinear target equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.
  • the process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii flux of the i-th channel 1W, which is obtained by integrating the following equation.
  • k m is a constant and is 673.
  • v( ⁇ ) is the light-effect distribution of the human visual spectrum. It should be noted here that the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the above illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device.
  • ⁇ vi ⁇ p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.
  • the CIE1931 xy coordinate of the surface color of the object under test under an illuminating body can be expressed as:
  • vector a x is represented Vector a y Vector a z If the source has n color channels, then p, a x , a y , and a z are all n ⁇ 1 vectors.
  • ⁇ xy The distance between it and the target color coordinates (x 'o, y' o ) is represented by ⁇ xy.
  • ⁇ xy The definition of ⁇ xy is as follows.
  • equation (3) can become:
  • k 1 (1-x' o )a x -x' o a y -x' o a z ,
  • k 3 a x + a y + a z .
  • ⁇ i,max represents the maximum luminous flux of the i-th color channel.
  • the constraint one [1,...,1]p>0 defines that the total radiant flux of the light source must be greater than 0, and the constraint condition ⁇ vi ⁇ p i ⁇ i,max defines that the luminous flux of each color channel cannot be greater than the maximum of the color channel.
  • Luminous flux, constraint three The color coordinate xy vector that defines the object to be tested can be matched with (x' o , y' o ).
  • the form of the optimization problem is a linear optimization problem. This optimization problem can obtain the global optimal solution through the existing mature algorithm.
  • This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:
  • the system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller.
  • the light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory.
  • the surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory.
  • the controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the color channels that the dimming signal transmits to the light source.
  • the system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.
  • the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the spokes.
  • the flux vector p is represented.
  • the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates.
  • the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels.
  • the color range of the object under the light source is also determined.
  • the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.
  • Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p.
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.
  • the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.
  • the process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W
  • p i is the ith component of the vector p.
  • ⁇ vi ⁇ p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.
  • the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body
  • the spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented.
  • the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained.
  • the dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from ⁇ i by the characteristics of the illuminant.
  • the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state
  • the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the ⁇ i by the scale factor previously calibrated.
  • Step 10 Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.
  • step 20 the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.
  • Step 30 Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.
  • step 40 the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.
  • step 50 a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.
  • step 60 the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.
  • the core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone.
  • the light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.
  • the spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple.
  • the effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device.
  • the spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.
  • the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.
  • the new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0% to 100%, which is determined by the user.
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.
  • k 1 [0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,
  • k 2 [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,
  • k 3 [5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T
  • the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively)
  • the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).
  • the optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained.
  • the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value
  • Table 4 PWM dimming signals at different saturation levels for different DUTs under 6500K reference source
  • a lighting control method is provided. It should be noted that the color tunable light source in this embodiment is equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • 21 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 21, the method includes the following steps S101 to S104:
  • Step S101 determining a target light color temperature value and a target color.
  • the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light
  • the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to enhance.
  • the target light color temperature value and the target color are determined by receiving the target light color temperature value and the target color input by the user.
  • Step S102 searching for data of the dimming signal corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color in the preset database.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.
  • the target light color temperature value and the target color determined above are input into a preset database, and a mapping relationship between the target light color temperature value and the target color and the dimming signal data in the preset database is obtained, and the target light is acquired through the mapping relationship.
  • the color temperature value corresponds to the dimming signal data of the target color.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is directly found in the preset database. It is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data through a large amount of data, and this step improves the processing speed of enhancing the color of the target object.
  • a preset database may be obtained from: creating an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is used to calculate the radiation flux, and the radiation flux is indicative of the color tunable light source radiation intensity Weak physical quantity; perform computational processing on the optimization equation to obtain the optimal solution of the radiant flux; obtain the dimming signal data according to the optimal solution of the radiant flux; create a preset database, wherein the database is used to store the dimming signal data .
  • the optimal solution of the radiant flux is calculated by the optimization equation, and the dimming signal data is obtained from the optimal solution of the radiant flux to create a preset database, and the preset database is used to store the dimming signal data.
  • an optimization equation can be created by creating a target equation, wherein the target equation is a spectrum of a standard light source, a tristimulus value function of a human eye, a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, a reflectance data of a target color sample, An equation created by the relative spectra and radiances of a color tunable light source; creating a constraint equation, where the constraint equation is the spectrum of the standard source, the color temperature of the target light, the tristimulus value of the human eye, and the reflectance data of the standard diffuse reflector The reflectivity data of the target color sample, the reflectance data of the contrast color sample of the target color sample, the relative spectrum of the color tunable light source, and the equation created by the radiant flux; the optimization equation is created by the target equation and the constraint equation.
  • the target equation can be created by the spectrum of the standard light source and the three-stimulus value function of the human eye. Calculating the first coordinate with the reflectance data of the standard diffuse reflector, wherein the first coordinate is the color coordinate of the standard diffuse body under the standard light source; the relative spectrum of the color tunable light source, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the target color sample. The reflectance data and the radiance flux calculate a coordinate expression of the target color sample; the target equation is created based on the first coordinate and the coordinate expression of the target color sample.
  • the standard light source at the target light color temperature is determined.
  • the u'v' coordinate of the target color sample can be reflected by the target color sample surface reflection spectrum, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the color is adjustable.
  • the relative spectral distribution of the light source and the radiant flux indicate that the coordinate expression of the target color sample is as shown in equations (1) and (2):
  • is the wavelength
  • r ( ⁇ ) is the spectral reflectance of the target color sample surface
  • s ( ⁇ ) is the relative spectral energy distribution of the color tunable light source
  • P is the radiant flux, if the light source has n color channels
  • p is an n ⁇ 1 vector
  • p T represents the matrix transpose of the radiant flux vector of the source.
  • Color target color samples under standardized light source u'v 'coordinates (u' o, v 'o ) is represented.
  • (u' o, v 'o ) of the target color may be reflectance spectrum of the sample surface,
  • the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, as well as the spectral distribution of the standard source, is calculated.
  • (u' n , v' n ) denote the coordinate point of the color of a standard diffuse reflector under a standard light source, ie the first coordinate.
  • the first coordinate can be calculated from the target color sample surface reflectance spectrum, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the spectral distribution of the standard light source.
  • a color point (u 'o, v' o ) of the saturation is represented by S. then
  • S value of the target sample color that is, to maximize the distance between the u'v' coordinate of the target sample color and (u' n , v' n ) .
  • the target equation is created based on the first coordinate (u' n , v' n ) and the coordinate expression of the target color sample. Get the target equation as follows:
  • the constraint equation can be created by calculating a first coordinate from a spectrum of a standard light source, a human eye tristimulus value function, and a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, wherein the first coordinate is a standard diffuse reflector at a standard light source The lower color coordinate; the second coordinate is calculated from the spectrum of the standard light source, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the reflectance data of the target color sample, wherein the second coordinate is the color coordinate of the target color sample under the standard light source; a relative expression of the light source, a tristimulus value function of the human eye, a reflectance data of the target color sample, and a coordinate expression of the target color sample of the target color sample; according to the first coordinate, the second coordinate, and the coordinate expression of the target color sample, Creating a first constraint equation; creating a second constraint of the contrast color sample of the target color sample from the spectrum of the color tunable light source, the spectrum of the standard light source, the tristimulus value
  • the slope of the first wiring 22 in FIG coordinate (u 'n, v' n ) and a second coordinate (u 'o, v' o ) represents target color samples (u 'o, v' o ) of the hue angle.
  • the line equations of the first coordinates (u' n , v' n ) and (u' o , v' o ) be:
  • the coordinate point of the u'v' coordinate of the target color sample of the newly rendered target object needs to satisfy the tone constraint equation (4).
  • r c represents the surface spectral reflectance of the contrast color sample of the target sample.
  • the xy color coordinate of the constrained light needs to be within the color temperature tolerance quadrilateral specified in ANSI 78.377.
  • the eight color temperature tolerance quadrilaterals specified in ANSI 78.377 are shown in Figure 23. For example, if the color temperature is required to be 6500K, the xy coordinates of the light are constrained in the quadrilateral framed by the thick black line in Fig. 23.
  • the xy coordinate constraint equation is as follows:
  • k l1 , k u1 , k l2 and k u2 represent the slopes of the linear equations, respectively, and b l1 , b u1 , b l2 and b u2 represent the intercepts of the linear equations, respectively.
  • the formula (7) is the objective equation
  • the formula (8), the formula (9), the formula (10), the formula (11), the formula (12), and the formula (13) are constraint equations.
  • Equation (8) is the hue constraint equation
  • formula (9) is the hue constraint equation
  • formula (10), formula (11), formula (12), and formula (13) are xy coordinate constraint equations.
  • Both the target equation and the constraint equation described above can be expressed by the radiant flux p, thereby calculating the optimal solution of the radiant flux.
  • the luminous flux of each channel of the color tunable light source is calculated.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the color tunable light source is calculated by the luminous flux of the color tunable light source.
  • the luminous flux of the LED chip is proportional to the dimming signal data, and the dimming signal data of each channel can be calculated from the luminous flux of each channel according to a preset proportional coefficient.
  • Step S103 modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.
  • the dimmed signal data corresponding to the found target light color temperature value and the target color is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal.
  • Step S104 controlling the color tunable light source to emit light through the light driving signal.
  • the color-adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained by the above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color-adjustable light source to be emitted.
  • the color temperature of the light is the color temperature value of the target light. It is guaranteed to enhance the color of the target object while ensuring the quality of the lighting rendering.
  • the illumination control method determines the target light color temperature value and the target color; searches for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color in the preset database; and performs the searched dimming signal data Modulation, obtaining a light driving signal; controlling the color adjustable light source to be illuminated by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color.
  • the color temperature of the light emitted by the light source is the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the lighting control method achieves the effect of enhancing the color of the target object while ensuring the quality of the light rendering.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 24, the method includes the following steps S101 to S105:
  • Step S101 Acquire a color parameter of the target object.
  • the parameters of the target object are determined by the acquired image of the target object.
  • Step S102 Search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database.
  • the obtained color parameter is input into the first preset database, and the mapping relationship between the color parameter and the color sample in the first preset database is obtained, and the target color sample corresponding to the color parameter is obtained through the mapping relationship.
  • Step S103 searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database.
  • the target color sample is input into the second preset database, and the mapping relationship between the target color sample and the dimming signal data in the second preset database is obtained, and the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample is obtained through the mapping relationship. .
  • Step S104 modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the found target color sample is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal.
  • Step S105 controlling the color adjustable light source to emit light by the light driving signal.
  • the color-adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained as described above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.
  • the light drives the signal, thus improving the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object.
  • the illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the invention obtains the dimming signal data through the color sample search, and obtains a light driving signal by using the dimming signal data, and the light driving signal drives the color adjustable light source to emit a light to illuminate the target object to make the target object The color is enhanced.
  • the dimming signal data is not required to be obtained through a large number of calculations on the acquired target object parameters, thereby obtaining a light driving signal to drive the color adjustable light source to emit light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. Therefore, the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object is improved.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a lighting control device. It should be noted that the lighting control device of the embodiment of the present invention can be used to execute the lighting control method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The lighting control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention will be described below.
  • the apparatus includes: an acquisition total module 10 for acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and a control total module 20 for The illumination body is controlled to emit light according to the dimming signal.
  • the technical effect of enhancing the color saturation of the surface of the object to be tested can be realized, thereby solving the technical problem that the existing light control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control device according to a second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 26, the device includes:
  • the receiving module 1001 is configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type;
  • the user can input the color temperature of the reference light source, the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum type of the illuminating body through the interaction device.
  • the interaction device may be a remote controller, and the user can use the remote controller to use the software.
  • the interface operates.
  • the query module 1003 queries, from the memory, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested by using the reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested;
  • the query module 1003 is further configured to use the reference light source color temperature to query the reference light source of the illumination body and the reference light source color coordinate, and use the illumination body spectral type to query the color channel spectrum of the illumination body from the memory, wherein the illumination body is to be Measuring the object to provide a light source;
  • the memory may pre-store the spectrum of each channel of the light source, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the reference input by the user in step S101 in the first embodiment is described.
  • the color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory
  • the color coordinate of the reference source corresponds to the spectrum of each channel of the light source.
  • the calculating module 1005 calculates the radiant flux according to the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body;
  • the conversion module 1007 is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.
  • each of the color channels irradiates the object to be tested in the form of white light according to the target radiation flux, and the color of the object to be tested may be used to maximize the color saturation of the object and the color tone of the object to be tested around the object to be tested. Not distorted.
  • the above four modules are combined, and the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that The output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light, and the color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, thereby solving the existing light control technology only improving the light color quality of the light itself or simply turning the light
  • the color is changed to the color of the object to be tested, and the problem of the color saturation of the object to be tested and the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately corrected.
  • the foregoing calculating module 1005 may further include:
  • a first sub-calculation module 1101 configured to obtain, by calculation, a color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test;
  • the reference light source may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time.
  • the above color coordinates (x o , y o ) may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960uv color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, and the like.
  • CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.
  • a second sub-calculation module 1103, configured to obtain color coordinates of a maximum saturation that can be achieved under the condensable light source by calculation
  • the model establishing module 1105 is configured to: according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, and the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • the spectrum of each channel of the light source and the target saturation level of the user input establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the third sub-calculation module 1107 is configured to calculate a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.
  • the first sub-calculation module 1101 may further include:
  • the fourth sub-calculation module 1201 is configured to calculate (x o , y o ) by the following formula:
  • p is a vector representing the radiant flux of each channel of the light source
  • the vector a xo represents Vector a yo
  • a zo representation r( ⁇ ) is the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested
  • s( ⁇ ) is the reference light source
  • the light source has n color channels
  • the reflectance spectrum of the test object may be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the test object previously stored in the memory may be used.
  • the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light sources uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant with different color temperatures, the color temperature is selected by the user, and the spectrum of the reference light source can also be User input manually.
  • the foregoing second sub-computing module 1103 may further include:
  • Obtaining a module configured to obtain color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source from the memory;
  • the fifth sub-calculation module is configured to: according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source, the reference light source spectrum, and the reflection of the surface of the object to be tested Rate distribution spectrum and spectrum of each channel of the light source are calculated
  • FIG. 3 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) is the color of the object under test under the reference light source.
  • the coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source.
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source and the color coordinates of the reference source (x r , The color of all the colors on the line of y r ) is the same. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 3, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source can be seen.
  • the color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • the level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.
  • the calculation model of the target radiant flux may be established as: establishing at least four constraints to define a range of values of the radiant flux vector p.
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total flux of all color channels is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate point of the object to be tested is on the line connecting (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ).
  • Constraint 4 The color coordinate point of the light is within the set white light area.
  • the objective equation is to minimize the weighted sum of d and total luminous flux, with the latter being optional, either added to the target equation or not.
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, and the only optimal solution that minimizes the value of the objective equation is determined by solving the mathematical optimization problem. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.
  • the second term of the objective equation can be any linear or nonlinear equation related to the radiant flux vector p.
  • the total luminous flux, light efficiency, CRI, etc. of all color channels can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • the luminous flux of each channel is equal to the luminous flux of the channel multiplied by the luminous flux converted by the radiation flux of the channel 1w
  • the color coordinates of the object to be tested may be represented by a reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, a CIE human eye tristimulus value function, a relative spectral distribution of each channel of the illumination body, and a radiation flux vector p.
  • a reflection spectrum of the object to be tested may be represented by a CIE human eye tristimulus value function, a relative spectral distribution of each channel of the illumination body, and a radiation flux vector p.
  • the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined.
  • the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.
  • Figure 3 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured in advance by the user and then input to the device.
  • the color of the light is limited to white light.
  • the ANSI C78.377 standard specifies eight quadrilaterals for eight color temperature points. We limit the color of the light to the white light area enclosed by these quadrilaterals.
  • the curve of the white light area piecewise function is shown in Fig. 4. In the CIE1931 xy coordinate system, the entire white light region is divided into two blocks, and the x-coordinates range from [x min , x mid ] and [x mid , x max ].
  • the piecewise linear fitting function of the upper limit of the white light region is:
  • the piecewise linear fit function for the lower bound of the white light region is:
  • the xy coordinate of the light color can be calculated by:
  • the luminous flux ⁇ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship.
  • the dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from ⁇ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the current value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the ⁇ i by the scale factor previously calibrated.
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested.
  • the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced.
  • the system output light is white light, and at the same time, according to the selected
  • the reference light color temperature fully adjusts the spectrum of the illumination source, and the operation is simple.
  • the output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.
  • FIG. 1 A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • the user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory.
  • the reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory.
  • the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory.
  • the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source.
  • the controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device.
  • the spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.
  • Table 1 Color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 8.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.
  • the optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.
  • Table 2 takes the reference light source of 6500K as an example, and gives the color color coordinates and the light color coordinates of the four objects corresponding to the objects in Table 1. Lamp PWM drive signal.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic view of a lighting control device according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG.
  • the receiving module 901 is configured to receive an identifier of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user;
  • the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested. Can be taken
  • the identification flag is transmitted to the controller by sensing using the sensor in the third embodiment, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.
  • the query module 903 is configured to use the identification mark to query the reflectivity distribution of the surface of the object to be tested from the memory; and is also used for querying the reference light source spectrum of the illumination body, the reference light source spectral color coordinate, and the light source by using the reference light source color temperature to query from the memory.
  • the memory in the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the reference input by the user in step S101 is described.
  • the color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source.
  • the calculation module 905 calculates the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body. the amount.
  • the conversion module 907 is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body.
  • each color channel of the illuminating body can illuminate the object to be tested according to the radiant flux, and the color of the object to be tested can satisfy the target saturation d.
  • the above four modules are combined to use the previously stored surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body so that the illuminating body Under the illumination of the output light, the saturation of the color of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light.
  • the color of the object to be tested it is impossible to quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • the foregoing calculating module 905 may further include:
  • a first sub-calculation module 9051 configured to acquire a target color coordinate by calculation, wherein the target color coordinate is a color coordinate presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d;
  • a model establishing module 9052 configured to establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body according to the target color coordinate;
  • the second sub-calculation module 9053 is configured to calculate a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.
  • the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.
  • the foregoing first sub-computing module 9051 may further include:
  • the third sub-calculation module 1001 is configured to calculate a color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum.
  • the reference light source spectrum may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time.
  • the fourth sub-computing module 1003 is configured to calculate the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
  • a fifth sub-module 1005 is calculated, was calculated from the measured color coordinates and the target color coordinate and saturation d the maximum saturation of the light spectrum of the target reference color coordinates (x 'o, y' o ).
  • the third sub-calculation module 1001 described above may be used to calculate (x o , y o ) by the following formula:
  • the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be calculated from the surface reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the standard light source spectral distribution.
  • the CIE XYZ value can be converted into CIE1931 xy color coordinate (x o , y o ).
  • the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested can be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or pre-existing. A standard reflectance spectrum of such a test object in the memory.
  • the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light sources uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant with different color temperatures, the color temperature is selected by the user, and the spectrum of the reference light source can also be User input manually.
  • the fourth sub-computing module 1003 calculates a color coordinate of a maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source.
  • the steps can include:
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum calculates the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source.
  • FIG. 13 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating a color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each color channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) for the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum
  • the color coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source spectrum.
  • the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum and the color of the reference source spectrum are known. All the colors of the lines on the coordinates (x r , y r ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 13, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference light source can be seen.
  • the color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
  • the level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.
  • the first sub-calculation module 9051 can calculate the target color coordinate (x′ o , y′ o ) by using the following formula.
  • d is a saturation level that can be expected by the user and can be expressed as a percentage.
  • calculation model of the above target radiant flux can be established as:
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object to be tested under the tonable light source provided by the illuminant can be matched with (x' o , y' o ).
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.
  • the target here can be any target equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.
  • the process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all effective solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution. Wait.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W
  • p i is the ith component of the vector p.
  • ⁇ vi ⁇ p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.
  • the CIE XYZ tristimulus value of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be obtained by the surface reflection function of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the channel of the illuminator The relative spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are expressed.
  • the XYZ expression can be converted into a CIE1931xy expression of the surface color of the object to be tested, so that the xy color coordinate expression is equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and The third constraint.
  • This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:
  • the system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller.
  • the light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory.
  • the surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory.
  • the controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the dimming signal to the light source. Each color channel.
  • the system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.
  • the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the spokes.
  • the flux vector p is represented.
  • the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates.
  • the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels.
  • the color range of the object under the light source is also determined.
  • the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.
  • Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • the level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.
  • d be the desired increase in saturation level, expressed as a percentage.
  • the color coordinate coordinates expected to be (x' o , y' o ), then (x' o , y' o ) can be calculated by the following formula.
  • constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p.
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.
  • the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.
  • the process of determining the optimal solution within a defined range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods. For example, traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W
  • p i is the ith component of the vector p.
  • ⁇ vi ⁇ p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.
  • the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body
  • the spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented.
  • the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained.
  • the dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from ⁇ i by the characteristics of the illuminant.
  • the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state
  • the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the ⁇ i by the scale factor previously calibrated.
  • Step 10 Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.
  • step 20 the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.
  • Step 30 Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.
  • step 40 the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.
  • step 50 a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.
  • step 60 the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.
  • the core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone.
  • the light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.
  • the spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple.
  • the effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device.
  • the spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.
  • the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.
  • the new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0% to 100%, which is determined by the user.
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.
  • k 1 [0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,
  • k 2 [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,
  • k 3 [5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T
  • the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively)
  • the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).
  • the optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained.
  • the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value
  • Table 4 PWM dimming signals at different saturation levels for different DUTs under 6500K reference source
  • the color tunable light source in this embodiment being equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • 28 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 28, the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40.
  • the determining unit 10 is configured to determine a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to a color that the target object needs to be enhanced.
  • the searching unit 20 is configured to search, in the preset database, the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.
  • the obtaining unit 30 is configured to obtain a light driving signal from the dimmed signal data obtained by the searching.
  • the control unit 40 is configured to control the color adjustable light source to emit light according to the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source.
  • the color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the light control device determines the target light color temperature value and the target color by the determining unit 10, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the searching unit
  • the data of the dimming signal corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, and the obtaining unit 30 searches by The obtained dimming signal data is obtained as a light driving signal.
  • the control unit 40 controls the color adjustable light source to emit light according to the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color adjustable light source.
  • the color temperature value of the target light since the control unit controls the color-adjustable light source to emit light, the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source enhances the target color of the target object, and controls the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to be the color temperature value of the target light. It enhances the quality of the light rendering while enhancing the color of the target object.
  • the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40.
  • the searching unit 20 further includes: a determining module 201, a calculating module 202, an obtaining module 203, and a creating module 204.
  • the functions of the determining unit 10, the searching unit 20, the obtaining unit 30 and the control unit 40 are the same as those in the above embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the determining module 201 is configured to determine an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is composed of a spectrum of a standard light source, a target light color temperature value, a human eye tristimulus value function, a standard diffuse reflectance data, a color tunable light source relative spectrum, and a spoke.
  • the equation created by flux wherein the spectrum of the standard source is the spectrum of the standard source obtained at the target color temperature, and the flux is the physical quantity representing the intensity of the tunable source.
  • the calculation module 202 is configured to perform a calculation process on the optimization equation to obtain an optimal solution of the radiant flux.
  • the obtaining module 203 is configured to obtain corresponding dimming signal data according to an optimal solution of the radiant flux.
  • the creating module 204 is configured to create a preset database, wherein the database is used to store dimming signal data.
  • the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40.
  • the searching unit 20 further includes: a determining module 201, a calculating module 202, an obtaining module 203, and a creating module 204.
  • the obtaining module 203 further includes: an obtaining submodule 2031, a first calculating submodule 2032, and a second calculating submodule 2033.
  • the functions of the determining unit 10, the searching unit 20, the obtaining unit 30, the controlling unit 40, the determining module 201, the calculating module 202, the obtaining module 203, and the creating module 204 are the same as those in the above embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the obtaining sub-module 2031 is configured to obtain a radiant flux of the color tunable light source.
  • the first calculating sub-module 2032 is configured to calculate a luminous flux of the color tunable light source according to the radiant flux of the color tunable light source.
  • the second calculating sub-module 2033 is configured to calculate dimming signal data corresponding to the color tunable light source according to the luminous flux of the color tunable light source.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Intended, as shown in FIG. 31, the apparatus includes: a first acquisition unit 10, a first search unit 20, a second search unit 30, a second acquisition unit 40, and a control unit 50.
  • the first obtaining unit 10 is configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object.
  • the first searching unit 20 is configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where the color samples corresponding to the different color parameters are pre-stored in the first preset database.
  • the second searching unit 30 is configured to search for dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset database prestores dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples.
  • the second obtaining unit 40 is configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.
  • the control unit 50 is configured to control the color adjustable light source illumination by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.
  • the first acquiring unit 10 is configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object
  • the first searching unit 20 is configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where The color data sample corresponding to the different color parameters is pre-stored in a preset database
  • the second search unit 30 is configured to search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, where the second preset database is pre-stored.
  • the second obtaining unit 40 is configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal
  • the control unit 50 is configured to control the color adjustable light source by the light driving signal.
  • the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color tunable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.
  • the illumination control device by directly searching for the dimming signal data, it is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data in a large amount online, thereby improving the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object.
  • the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, a second searching unit 30, The second acquisition unit 40 and the control unit 50.
  • the first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first obtaining module 101, a processing module 102, a first determining module 103, a second determining module 104, a third determining module 105, and a converting module 106.
  • the functions of the first obtaining unit 10, the first searching unit 20, the second searching unit 30, the second obtaining unit 40, and the control unit 50 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the first acquisition module 101 is configured to acquire an image of the target object.
  • the processing module 102 is configured to perform white balance processing on the image of the target object, and acquire an image of the processed target object.
  • the first determining module 103 is configured to determine a target area in the image of the processed target object.
  • the second determining module 104 is configured to determine a primary color of the target area.
  • the third determining module 105 is configured to determine a color component value of the main color of the target area.
  • Conversion module 106 is operative to convert color component values to tone values and saturation values.
  • the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, and a second searching unit 30.
  • the first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first acquiring module 101, and processing The module 102, the first determining module 103, the second determining module 104, the third determining module 105, and the converting module 106.
  • the second determining module 104 further includes: a first obtaining submodule 1041, a first determining submodule 1042, a second obtaining submodule 1043, and a second determining submodule 1044.
  • the functions of the third determining module 105 and the converting module 106 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the first acquisition sub-module 1041 is configured to acquire pixel points in an image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points.
  • the first determining sub-module 1042 is configured to determine a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein different color vectors of the plurality of color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixel points.
  • the second obtaining sub-module 1043 is configured to perform an averaging calculation on the plurality of color vectors to obtain an average vector.
  • the second determination sub-module 1044 is configured to determine the average vector as the primary color of the target area.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of another alternative lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, and a second searching unit 30.
  • the first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first obtaining module 101, a processing module 102, a first determining module 103, a second determining module 104, a third determining module 105, and a converting module 106.
  • the second determining module 104 further includes: a third obtaining submodule 1045, a third determining submodule 1046, a statistic submodule 1047, and a fourth obtaining submodule 1048.
  • the functions of the third determining module 105 and the converting module 106 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the third obtaining sub-module 1045 is configured to acquire pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points.
  • the third determining sub-module 1046 is configured to determine a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein different color vectors of the plurality of color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixel points.
  • Statistics sub-module 1047 is used to count the proportion of color vectors in all color vectors.
  • the fourth obtaining sub-module 1048 is configured to obtain the highest-priority color vector, and determine the color vector as the main color of the target area.
  • a lighting control system is also provided. It should be noted that the illumination control system of the embodiment of the present invention may be used to perform the illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the present invention.
  • 35 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 35, the system includes: an illuminating body 10; and a total controller 20 for acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body, and adjusting according to The light signal controls the illumination of the illumination body.
  • the technical effect of enhancing the color saturation of the surface of the object to be tested can be realized, thereby solving the technical problem that the existing light control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • FIG. 36 is a second embodiment according to the present invention.
  • a schematic diagram of a lighting control system, as shown in Figure 36, the system includes:
  • the memory 1100 is configured to store a spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, a reference source of the illuminating body, a reference source color coordinate, and a reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested;
  • the controller 1300 is configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectral type of the illuminating body, and use the reflectivity type of the surface of the measuring object to query the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the reference source color temperature to query from the memory to obtain the reference source of the illuminant, the reference source color coordinates, and use the illuminant spectrum type to query the illuminator color channel spectrum from the memory, according to the reference source, the reference source color coordinates, the object to be tested
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator are used to calculate the radiant flux, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained; and the target radiant flux is converted into the dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.
  • the illuminating body 1400 is configured to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested.
  • the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that the output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light.
  • the color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the object to be tested.
  • the color cannot accurately and quantitatively enhance the color saturation of the object to be tested and at the same time distort the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested.
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested.
  • the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced.
  • the output light of the system is white light.
  • the spectrum of the illumination source is fully adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature, and the operation is simple. In the case where the spectrum of the light source is suitable, the effect of the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested can be accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.
  • the output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.
  • FIG. 1 A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • the user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory.
  • the reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory.
  • the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory.
  • the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source.
  • the controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device.
  • the spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the reference source
  • the spectrum and the reflectance of the object to be measured are calculated according to the true color of the object to be measured, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.
  • Table 1 Color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 8.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.
  • the optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.
  • the PWM value obtained by the illuminated object under different reference light sources can be obtained, and Table 2 Taking the 6500K reference light source as an example, the color color coordinates, the light color coordinates, and the lamp PWM driving signal of the four objects corresponding to the four objects in Table 1 are given.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control system according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 37, the system includes:
  • the memory 1101 is configured to store a spectrum of each color channel of the light source, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested;
  • a sensor 1103 configured to transmit an identifier to the controller by sensing, wherein the identifier is associated with the object to be tested;
  • the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the sensor 1103 that can be employed transmits the identification flag to the controller by sensing, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.
  • the controller 1105 is configured to receive an identifier of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user, and use the identification mark to query the reflectivity distribution of the surface of the object to be tested from the memory;
  • the reference source color temperature is queried from the memory to obtain the reference source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source spectral color coordinate, and the color channel color spectrum of the light source, according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, and the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the reflectance distribution and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source are calculated by the radiant flux to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; the target radiant flux is converted into the dimming signal of each light source channel provided by the illuminating body.
  • the illuminating body 1107 is configured to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested.
  • the memory 1101 of the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested.
  • the user input in step S101 is required.
  • the reference color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the light source Color channel spectrum.
  • the controller 1105 adjusts the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body by using the previously stored surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source, so that the light is outputted in the illuminating body.
  • the saturation of the color of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to be tested.
  • the color of the object cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.
  • This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:
  • the system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller.
  • the light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance.
  • the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory.
  • the surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark.
  • the controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory.
  • the controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the color channels that the dimming signal transmits to the light source.
  • the system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.
  • the tristimulus value CIEXYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the radiant
  • the quantity vector p is used to represent.
  • the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates.
  • the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels.
  • the color range of the object under the light source is also determined.
  • the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED.
  • Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B.
  • constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p.
  • the constraints include:
  • Constraint 1 The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.
  • Constraint 2 The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.
  • Constraint 3 The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).
  • the solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.
  • the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.
  • the process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.
  • ⁇ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W
  • p i is the ith component of the vector p.
  • ⁇ vi ⁇ p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.
  • the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body
  • the spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented.
  • the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained.
  • the dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from ⁇ i by the characteristics of the illuminant.
  • the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state
  • the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the ⁇ i by the scale factor previously calibrated.
  • Step 10 Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.
  • step 20 the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.
  • Step 30 Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.
  • step 40 the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.
  • step 50 a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.
  • step 60 the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.
  • the core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:
  • a system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone.
  • the light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.
  • the spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple.
  • the effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.
  • the reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.
  • the spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device.
  • the spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user.
  • the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.
  • FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.
  • the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.
  • the new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0-100%, which is determined by the user.
  • the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:
  • the user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374).
  • the bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17.
  • the lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue).
  • the spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.
  • k 1 [0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,
  • k 2 [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,
  • k 3 [5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T
  • the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively)
  • the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).
  • the optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).
  • the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained.
  • the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value
  • Table 4 corresponds to the PWM dimming signal of different saturation levels of different analytes under the 6500K reference light source.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention, as shown in Figure 38, the system comprising:
  • the memory 100 the color tunable light source 200, and the controller 300.
  • the memory 100 is configured to store a preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.
  • a color tunable light source 200 for providing a light source to a target object.
  • the controller 300 is configured to receive a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the target light color temperature value is searched in the preset database.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color is obtained from the dimmed signal data obtained by the search, and the color driving light source is controlled by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source.
  • the target color of the target object is enhanced, and the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color adjustable light source is controlled to be the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the lighting control system stores a preset database through the memory 100, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.
  • the color tunable light source 200 provides a light source for the target object.
  • the controller 300 receives the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the target light color temperature value and the target color are searched in the preset database.
  • the dimming signal data obtained by the finding obtains a light driving signal
  • the color driving light source is controlled by the light driving signal
  • the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to make the target object
  • the target color is enhanced
  • the color temperature of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source is controlled to be the color temperature value of the target light.
  • the controller since the controller controls the color-adjustable light source to emit light, the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source enhances the target color of the target object, and the controller controls the color temperature of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to be the color temperature of the target light. The value ensures the quality of the light rendering while enhancing the color of the target object.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention, as shown in Figure 39, the system comprising:
  • Sensor 100 Memory 200, controller 300, and color tunable light source 400.
  • the sensor 100 is used to acquire an image of a target object.
  • the sensor 100 can acquire an image of a target object.
  • the sensor 100 is an image sensor, and an image of the target object is captured by the image sensor to acquire an image of the target object.
  • the memory 200 is used to store a preset database.
  • the memory 200 is configured to store a preset database, where the preset database includes a plurality of preset databases, and the plurality of preset databases include a first preset database and a second preset database, where the first preset database is pre-stored corresponding to The target color samples of the different color parameters are pre-stored with the dimming signal data corresponding to the different target color samples.
  • the first preset database may be obtained in the following manner, and the color gamut is divided into N parts, wherein N is greater than 1, and N color samples are taken to represent the N colors, and the hue value and saturation of each color sample are determined.
  • the first preset database is used to store the hue value and the saturation value corresponding to each color sample and each color sample.
  • a first preset database is obtained.
  • Table 5 the correspondence between the color samples in Table 5 and the saturation value and the tonal value is obtained.
  • the color of beef, orange, kumquat and cucumber under the standard light source D65 is considered to be the true color of the object, representing different color types.
  • Hi and Si represent tone values and saturation values.
  • the correspondence between the color sample and the saturation value and the tone value is obtained by Table 5. According to the correspondence relationship, the corresponding color sample can be found by the saturation value and the tonal value of the target object.
  • the controller 300 is configured to receive an image of the target object, determine a color parameter of the target object by using an image of the target object, search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for a color sample in the second preset database.
  • the corresponding dimming signal data is modulated to obtain the dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and the color adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal.
  • the controller 300 receives an image of the target object collected by the sensor 100, and processes the image of the target object to acquire the color parameter of the target object.
  • the image of the target object may be processed by performing white balance processing on the image of the target object, and performing white balance processing so that the image of the target object is not distorted. And the color of the target image is restored to normal.
  • Determining the target area in the image of the processed target object may determine the target area by an edge detection technique or a manner in which the user directly specifies the target area. Determining the main color of the target area in the target area of the image of the target object, and determining the color of the main color of the target area A color component value that converts a color component value into a tone value and a saturation value.
  • the main color of the target area may be determined by: acquiring pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points; determining a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein, the plurality of color vectors Different color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixels; performing an averaging calculation on the plurality of color vectors to obtain an average vector; determining the average vector as the main color of the target area.
  • the main color of the target area may be determined by: acquiring pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points; determining a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein the plurality of color vectors are different The color vector corresponds to different pixel points of the plurality of pixels; the ratio of the statistical color vector in all the color vectors; the color vector with the highest ratio is obtained, and the color vector is determined as the main color of the target area.
  • the controller 300 is further configured to search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database.
  • the color control sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database in the illumination control system includes: Obtaining a first preset database, wherein the first preset database prestores different color samples and color parameters corresponding to different color samples, the color parameters include a hue value and a saturation value; and the hue in the first preset database
  • the value and saturation values constitute a vector set, wherein the vector set includes a plurality of vectors, the plurality of vectors including the first vector and the second vector, wherein the vector set includes a plurality of vectors, the plurality of vectors including the first vector and the second vector And forming a target vector by the tonal value and the saturation value corresponding to the image of the target object; acquiring a first distance between the target vector and the first vector; acquiring a second distance between the target vector and the second vector; determining whether the first distance is smaller than the second a distance; in the case
  • the vector in the vector set corresponding to the minimum distance is obtained by determining the minimum distance between the target vector and the vector in the vector set, and the color samples corresponding to the hue value and the saturation value in the vector are determined as the color samples corresponding to the target color, and the operation is performed. Find the color samples corresponding to the color parameters more accurately.
  • searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database includes: in the second preset database The dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is searched for, wherein the dimming signal data corresponding to the different color samples is pre-stored in the second preset database.
  • the determined color samples are input into the second preset database to obtain a mapping relationship between the color samples and the dimming signal data in the second preset database.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is obtained by the mapping relationship.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is directly found in the second preset database. It is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data through a large amount of data, and this step improves the processing speed of enhancing the color of the target object.
  • the controller 300 is further configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal, and control the color adjustable light source to emit light through the light driving signal.
  • the dimming signal data corresponding to the found color sample is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal.
  • the light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained by the above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object.
  • the color tunable light source 400 is used to provide a light source for the target object.
  • the color tunable light source 400 is controlled to emit light according to the light driving signal, and the light emitted by the color tunable light source 400 illuminates the target object to enhance the color of the target object.
  • the illumination control system acquires an image of the target object through the sensor 100; the memory 200 stores a preset database; the color tunable light source 400 provides a light source for the target object; and the controller 300 receives the image of the target object through the target object.
  • the image determines a color parameter of the target object, searches for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, searches for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database, and performs the dimmed signal data obtained by the finding Modulation, to obtain a light drive signal; control the color adjustable light source by the light drive signal.
  • the controller 300 finds a corresponding color sample through a color parameter; obtains dimming signal data through the color sample search; obtains a light driving signal through the dimming signal data, and the light driving signal drives the color adjustable
  • the light source emits light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. It is not necessary to obtain dimming signal data through a large number of calculations on the collected target object parameters, thereby obtaining a light driving signal to drive the color adjustable light source to emit light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. Therefore, the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object is improved.
  • the disclosed technical contents may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit may be a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, unit or module, and may be electrical or otherwise.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention, which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium.
  • a number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a Read-Only Memory (ROM), a Random Access Memory (RAM), a removable hard disk, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .

Landscapes

  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

An illumination control method, device, and system, the illumination control method comprising: obtaining a dimming signal of an illuminant; controlling the illuminant to emit light according to the dimming signal. The method solves the technical problem that current lighting control technologies are incapable of quantitatively and accurately enhancing the color of the illuminated object to be detected.

Description

照明控制方法、装置及系统Lighting control method, device and system 技术领域Technical field

本发明涉及照明领域,具体而言,涉及一种照明控制方法、装置及系统。The present invention relates to the field of illumination, and in particular to a lighting control method, apparatus and system.

背景技术Background technique

随着半导体照明技术的成熟,具有红色,绿色,蓝色等彩色光源混合产生白光的颜色可调光源被广泛地应用在商场,超市及博物馆的照明当中。在这些应用场合中,商品或者展览品通常被灯具重点照明,并且这些应用场合对照明灯光的色温有一定要求。因此调节颜色可调光源的输出光色使得被照待测物在参考色温下对于观察者来说颜色鲜艳和有吸引力很重要。用于增加待测物颜色的鲜艳程度的照明控制方法在商业,艺术品展览等方面具有很好的应用前景。比如飞利浦的超市照明解决方案针对不同被照商品调节灯光颜色和色温使得食物看上去更加诱人。例如用淡粉色灯光去照牛肉让牛肉看上去鲜嫩多汁而用冷白灯光照海鲜产品使得海鲜看上去新鲜。还有的商家采用控制光源使得输出的灯光有较高的颜色显色指数(CRI)或者较高的颜色准确性(color accuracy)来增加待测物颜色的鲜艳程度。With the maturity of semiconductor lighting technology, color-adjustable light sources with red, green, blue and other color light sources mixed to produce white light are widely used in the lighting of shopping malls, supermarkets and museums. In these applications, goods or exhibits are usually highlighted by luminaires, and these applications have certain requirements for the color temperature of the lighting. Therefore, it is important to adjust the output light color of the color tunable light source so that the object to be tested is bright and attractive to the observer at the reference color temperature. The lighting control method for increasing the vividness of the color of the object to be tested has a good application prospect in terms of commercial and art exhibitions. For example, Philips' supermarket lighting solutions adjust the color and color temperature of different products to make the food look more attractive. For example, using light pink light to shoot beef to make the beef look fresh and juicy, and the seafood products with cold white light make the seafood look fresh. Other merchants use a control light source to make the output light have a higher color rendering index (CRI) or higher color accuracy to increase the vividness of the color of the object to be tested.

这里需要说明的是,现有调光技术调光控制方法简单,只是简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,在提高被照待测物颜色饱和度的同时改变待测物颜色的色调,或者专注于提高颜色可调光源的输出光色品质,控制光源输出的灯光有较高的颜色显色指数或者较高的颜色准确性,而不考虑灯光颜色对目标物体的影响,因此达不到增强目标物体颜色的效果。比如在一个高CRI的灯具下人脸的颜色可能会不自然,因为它对皮肤色的显色指数不高并且达不到增强颜色的效果从而不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩,而且在提高待测物颜色饱和度的同时使得待测物周围的待测物颜色失真。It should be noted here that the existing dimming technology dimming control method is simple, and simply replaces the color of the light with the color of the object to be tested, and changes the color tone of the object to be tested while improving the color saturation of the object to be tested. Or focus on improving the output light color quality of the color-adjustable light source, and controlling the light output by the light source to have a higher color rendering index or higher color accuracy, regardless of the influence of the light color on the target object, so To enhance the effect of the color of the target object. For example, the color of a human face under a high CRI luminaire may be unnatural because it does not have a high color rendering index for the skin color and does not achieve the effect of enhancing the color, so that the color of the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately enhanced. Moreover, the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested is distorted while increasing the color saturation of the object to be tested.

此外,现有技术照明控制方法采用颜色传感器获得目标物体的颜色,通过对目标物体的颜色信息进行计算得到驱动灯光信号,根据灯光驱动信号对调节颜色可调光源进行调整,以使颜色可调光源发出灯光照射目标物体使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,实现了自动识别目标物体的颜色来调节灯光以增强目标物体颜色,但是整个过程数据计算量大,导致处理速度慢。In addition, the prior art lighting control method uses a color sensor to obtain the color of the target object, obtains a driving light signal by calculating the color information of the target object, and adjusts the adjusted color adjustable light source according to the lighting driving signal to make the color adjustable light source The illumination of the target object is performed to enhance the target color of the target object, and the color of the target object is automatically recognized to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object, but the entire process data is computationally intensive, resulting in slow processing speed.

针对现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的问题,目前尚未提出有效的解决方案。In view of the fact that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested, an effective solution has not yet been proposed.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本发明实施例提供了一种照明控制方法、装置及系统,以至少解决现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的技术问题。Embodiments of the present invention provide a lighting control method, apparatus, and system to at least solve the technical problem that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

根据本发明实施例的一个方面,提供了一种照明控制方法,包括:获取照明体的调光信号;以及按照调光信号控制照明体发光。 According to an aspect of an embodiment of the present invention, a lighting control method includes: acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and controlling illuminating body illuminating according to the dimming signal.

进一步地,获取照明体的调光信号包括:接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型;使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供可调色光源;根据照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Further, acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: receiving a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type; and using the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested to obtain a test from the memory The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object; the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body and the color coordinates of the reference light source are obtained by querying the color temperature of the reference light source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body is obtained by querying from the memory using the illuminating body spectral type, wherein the illuminating body is The object to be tested provides a condensable light source; the radiant flux is calculated according to the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, and the target corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained. Radiation flux; converts the target radiant flux into a dimming signal for each color channel of the illuminator.

进一步地,根据照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量包括:通过计算获取待测物在参考光源下的色坐标;通过计算获取待测物在可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标;根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标、待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度色坐标、照明体各颜色通道光谱和用户输入的目标饱和度水平建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。Further, the radiant flux calculation is performed according to the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained: Calculating the color coordinates of the object under test under the reference light source; obtaining the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be measured can be achieved under the condensable light source; calculating the color coordinates of the object under the reference light source and the object to be tested The maximum saturation color coordinate that can be achieved under the reference light source, the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body, and the target saturation level of the user input establish a calculation model of the target radiation flux corresponding to the illumination body; according to the target radiation flux corresponding to the illumination body The calculation model calculates the target radiant flux.

进一步地,获取照明体的调光信号包括:接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d;使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供可调色光源;根据目标饱和度d、参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Further, acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: receiving an identification mark of the object to be detected detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; and using the identification mark to query the object to be tested from the memory The reflectance distribution of the surface; the reference source spectrum is obtained from the memory using the reference source color temperature, the color coordinates of the reference source, and the color channel spectrum of the illuminator, wherein the illuminator provides a tonable source for the object to be tested; d. The reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator are used to calculate the radiant flux, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained; and the target radiant flux is converted into The dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminator.

进一步地,根据目标饱和度d、参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量包括:通过计算获取目标色坐标,其中,目标色坐标是待测物达到目标饱和度d时所呈现的色坐标;根据目标色坐标建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。Further, according to the target saturation d, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, the radiant flux calculation is performed, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained. Obtaining a target color coordinate by calculation, wherein the target color coordinate is a color coordinate presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d; and calculating a target radiation flux corresponding to the illuminant according to the target color coordinate; corresponding to the illuminating body The target radiant flux calculation model calculates the target radiant flux.

进一步地,获取照明体的调光信号包括:确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色;在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据,按照调光信号控制照明体发光包括:对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制照明体发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。Further, obtaining the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: determining a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced; in a preset database. Searching for dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, and controlling the illumination body illumination according to the dimming signal includes: The obtained dimming signal data is modulated to obtain a light driving signal; the lighting driving signal is used to control the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the illumination light emitted by the illumination body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object. And controlling the color temperature of the light emitted by the illuminating body is the color temperature value of the target light.

进一步地,通过以下方式得到预设数据库:创建优化方程,其中,优化方程用于计算辐通量,辐通量是表示照明体辐射强弱的物理量;对优化方程执行计算处理,得到辐通量的最优解;根据辐通量的最优解,得到调光信号数据;以及创建预设数据库,其中,预设数据库用于存储调光信号数据。Further, the preset database is obtained by: creating an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is used for calculating the radiation flux, and the radiation flux is a physical quantity indicating the radiation intensity of the illumination body; performing calculation processing on the optimization equation to obtain the radiation flux An optimal solution; obtaining dimming signal data according to an optimal solution of the radiant flux; and creating a preset database, wherein the preset database is used to store the dimming signal data.

进一步地,通过以下方式创建优化方程:创建目标方程,其中,目标方程是由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的反 射率数据、照明体的相对光谱和辐通量创建的方程;创建约束方程,其中,约束方程是由标准光源的光谱、目标灯光色温值、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的对比颜色样本的反射率数据、照明体的相对光谱和辐通量创建的方程;以及通过目标方程和约束方程创建优化方程。Further, an optimization equation is created by creating a target equation, wherein the target equation is a spectrum of a standard light source, a tristimulus value function of a human eye, a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, and a counter of a target color sample. An equation created by the radiance data, the relative spectrum of the illuminant, and the radiant flux; a constraint equation is created, where the constraint equation is the spectrum of the standard source, the color temperature of the target light, the tristimulus value of the human eye, and the reflection of the standard diffuse reflector The rate data, the reflectance data of the target color sample, the reflectance data of the contrast color samples of the target color sample, the equations created by the relative spectra of the illuminants, and the radiant flux; and the optimization equations are created by the target equation and the constraint equation.

进一步地,获取照明体的调光信号包括:获取目标物体的颜色参数;在第一预设数据库中查找目标颜色样本,其中,目标颜色样本为与颜色参数对应的颜色样本,其中,第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数;在第二预设数据库中查找与目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据;按照调光信号控制照明体发光包括:对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。Further, acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body includes: acquiring a color parameter of the target object; searching for a target color sample in the first preset database, wherein the target color sample is a color sample corresponding to the color parameter, wherein the first pre- Setting a color parameter corresponding to different color samples and different color samples in the database; searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset database is pre-stored corresponding to Dimming signal data of different target color samples; controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal comprises: modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; controlling the illumination of the illumination body by the driving signal of the light, wherein the driving signal of the light It is used to control the light emitted by the illuminating body to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object.

进一步地,通过以下方式获取目标物体的颜色参数,其中,颜色参数包括多个颜色参数,多个颜色参数包括色调值和饱和度值:获取目标物体的图像;对目标物体的图像执行白平衡处理,获取处理后的目标物体的图像;确定处理后的目标物体的图像中的目标区域;确定目标区域的主色彩;确定目标区域主色彩的颜色分量值;以及将颜色分量值转换为色调值和饱和度值。Further, the color parameter of the target object is acquired by the following method, wherein the color parameter includes a plurality of color parameters including a tone value and a saturation value: acquiring an image of the target object; performing white balance processing on the image of the target object Obtaining an image of the processed target object; determining a target area in the image of the processed target object; determining a main color of the target area; determining a color component value of the main color of the target area; and converting the color component value into a hue value and Saturation value.

根据本发明实施例的另一方面,还提供了一种照明控制装置,包括:获取总模块,用于获取照明体的调光信号;以及控制总模块,用于按照调光信号控制照明体发光。According to another aspect of the embodiments of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control apparatus, comprising: an acquisition total module for acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and a control total module for controlling illuminating body illumination according to the dimming signal .

进一步地,获取总模块包括:接收模块,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型;查询模块,用于使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;查询模块还用于使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供可调色光源;计算模块,用于根据照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;转换模块,用于将目标辐通量转化成照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Further, the acquiring total module includes: a receiving module, configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectral type of the illuminating body; and a query module for using a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested The memory is queried to obtain the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; the query module is further configured to use the reference source color temperature to query the reference source spectrum of the illuminant from the memory, the reference source color coordinate, and use the illuminant spectrum type to query and obtain illumination from the memory. Each color channel spectrum, wherein the illuminating body provides a condensable light source for the object to be tested; a calculation module for the reference light source spectrum according to the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the illuminating body Each color channel spectrum is subjected to radiant flux calculation to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; and a conversion module is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body.

进一步地,获取总模块包括:接收模块,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d;查询模块,用于使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;查询模块还用于使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供可调色光源;计算模块,根据目标饱和度d、参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;转换模块,用于将目标辐通量转化成照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Further, the acquiring total module includes: a receiving module, configured to receive an identifier of the object to be detected detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; and a query module, configured to use the identifier from the memory The query obtains the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; the query module is also used to query the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body by using the reference source color temperature from the memory, wherein the illumination body is to be tested The object provides a condensable light source; the calculation module calculates the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator to obtain an illuminating body. Corresponding target radiant flux; a conversion module for converting the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body.

进一步地,获取总模块包括:获取总模块包括:确定单元,用于确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色;查找单元,用于在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据,控制总模块包括:获取单元,用于由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号;控制单元,用于根据灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱 动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制照明体发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。Further, the acquiring the total module includes: acquiring the total module, comprising: a determining unit, configured to determine a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced. a searching unit, configured to search, in the preset database, the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, The control module includes: an obtaining unit, configured to obtain a light driving signal by the obtained dimming signal data; and a control unit configured to control the lighting body to emit light according to the lighting driving signal, wherein the lighting driver The motion signal is used to control the light emitted by the illuminating body to enhance the target color of the target object, and to control the color temperature value of the light emitted by the illuminating body as the color temperature value of the target light.

进一步地,获取总模块包括:第一获取单元,用于获取目标物体的颜色参数;第一查找单元,用于在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本,其中,第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数;第二查找单元,用于第二预设数据库中查找与目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据;控制总模块包括:第二获取单元,用于对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;控制单元,用于灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强。Further, the acquiring the total module includes: a first acquiring unit, configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object; and a first searching unit, configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where the first pre- Setting a color parameter corresponding to a different color sample and a different color sample in the database; the second searching unit is configured to search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset The dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples is prestored in the database; the control total module comprises: a second acquiring unit, configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and a control unit for the light The driving signal controls the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the illumination driving signal is used to control the illumination emitted by the illumination body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.

根据本发明实施例的另一方面,还提供了一种照明控制系统,包括:照明体;以及总控制器,用于获取照明体的调光信号,并按照调光信号控制照明体发光。According to another aspect of an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control system comprising: an illuminating body; and a general controller for acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body and controlling the illuminating body illuminating according to the dimming signal.

进一步地,总控制器中包括:存储器,用于存储照明体各颜色通道光谱、照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;控制器,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型,使用测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,根据参考光源、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号,其中,照明体用于为待测物提供可调色光源。Further, the total controller includes: a memory for storing each color channel spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference source color coordinate, and a reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested; and a controller for receiving the user Input reference source color temperature, reflectance type of the object to be tested, and illuminant spectrum type, use the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to query the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested; use the reference source color temperature from the memory The reference light source and the reference light source color coordinate of the illumination body are obtained by querying, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body is obtained by using the illumination body spectrum type from the memory, according to the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the illumination body. Each color channel spectrum is subjected to radiant flux calculation to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide the object to be tested A gradable light source.

进一步地,总控制器中包括:存储器,用于存储照明体各颜色通道光谱、照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布;传感器,用于通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,身份识别标志关联待测物;控制器,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,根据目标饱和度d、照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体各颜色通道的调光信号,其中,照明体用于为待测物提供可调色光源。Further, the total controller includes: a memory for storing each color channel spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; and a sensor for sensing The identification mark is transmitted to the controller, wherein the identification mark is associated with the object to be tested; the controller is configured to receive the identification mark of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and the reference light source color temperature and target saturation d used by the user The identification mark is queried from the memory to obtain a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body are obtained by using the reference light source color temperature from the memory, according to the target saturation d The reference source spectrum of the illuminating body, the spectral color coordinate of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the radiance flux of each color channel of the illuminator are calculated to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; a dimming signal converted into a color channel of the illuminator, wherein the illuminating body is used for The toner was measured to provide a light source.

进一步地,总控制器中包括:存储器,用于存储预设数据库,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据;控制器,用于接收目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色,在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,通过灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制照明体发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值,其中,照明体用于为目标物体提供光源。Further, the total controller includes: a memory, configured to store a preset database, wherein the preset database prestores dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors; and the controller is configured to receive the target light color temperature The value and the target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database, The light driving signal is obtained by searching the obtained dimming signal data, and the lighting body is controlled to emit light by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used for controlling the light emitted by the lighting body to enhance the target color of the target object, and controlling the emitted by the lighting body. The color temperature of the light is the color temperature value of the target light, and the illuminating body is used to provide a light source for the target object.

进一步地,总控制器中包括:传感器,用于获取目标物体的图像;存储器,用于存储预设数据库,其中,预设数据库中包含多个预设数据库,多个预设数据库中包含 第一预设数据库和第二预设数据库,第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同颜色样本的调光信号数据;控制器,用于接收目标物体的图像,通过目标物体的图像,确定目标物体的颜色参数,在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本,在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制照明体发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强,其中,照明体用于为目标物体提供光源。Further, the total controller includes: a sensor for acquiring an image of the target object; and a memory for storing the preset database, wherein the preset database includes a plurality of preset databases, and the plurality of preset databases include a first preset database and a second preset database, wherein the first preset database prestores different color samples and color parameters corresponding to different color samples, and the second preset database prestores dimming corresponding to different color samples. a signal data, a controller, configured to receive an image of the target object, determine an color parameter of the target object by using an image of the target object, search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for a second preset database The dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is modulated to obtain the dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; the lighting driving signal is used to control the illumination of the illumination body, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the illumination target emitted by the illumination body The object is such that the color of the target object is enhanced, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide a light source for the target object.

在本发明实施例中,通过获取照明体的调光信号;以及按照调光信号控制照明体发光,达到了定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的目的,从而实现了增强待测物表面颜色饱和度的技术效果,进而解决了现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的技术问题。In the embodiment of the present invention, by acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body and controlling the illuminating body illuminating according to the dimming signal, the purpose of quantitatively and accurately enhancing the color of the object to be tested is achieved, thereby enhancing the surface of the object to be tested. The technical effect of color saturation further solves the technical problem that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

附图说明DRAWINGS

此处所说明的附图用来提供对本发明的进一步理解,构成本申请的一部分,本发明的示意性实施例及其说明用于解释本发明,并不构成对本发明的不当限定。在附图中:The drawings described herein are intended to provide a further understanding of the invention, and are intended to be a part of the invention. In the drawing:

图1是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制方法的流程图;1 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a first embodiment of the present invention;

图2是根据本发明第二实施例的照明控制方法的流程图;2 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图3是根据本发明第二实施例的待测物在固定光源下颜色范围的示意图;3 is a schematic view showing a color range of a test object under a fixed light source according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图4是根据本发明第二实施例的白光区域函数的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a white light region function according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图5是根据本发明第二实施例的可选的照明控制方法的流程图;Figure 5 is a flow chart of an alternative lighting control method in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention;

图6是根据本发明第二实施例的带有白光约束的增加被照待测物颜色鲜艳度的系统框图;6 is a system block diagram of a method for increasing the color vividness of an object to be tested with a white light constraint according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图7是根据本发明第二实施例的用户输入参考色温的软件界面示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of a software interface for a user to input a reference color temperature according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图8是根据本发明第二实施例的皮包反射率的数据;Figure 8 is data of a bag reflectance according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图9是根据本发明第二实施例的D65的光谱分布示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the spectral distribution of D65 according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图10是根据本发明第二实施例的照明体提供光源的四通道的光谱分布示意图;10 is a schematic diagram showing a four-channel spectral distribution of a light source provided by an illuminating body according to a second embodiment of the present invention;

图11是根据本发明第二实施例的皮包在四通道灯下的色域的示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic illustration of a color gamut of a purse under a four-channel lamp in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention;

图12是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制方法的流程图;Figure 12 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a third embodiment of the present invention;

图13是根据本发明实施例的第三待测物在固定光源下颜色范围的示意图;13 is a schematic diagram of a color range of a third object under a fixed light source according to an embodiment of the invention;

图14是根据本发明第三实施例的增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统框图;Figure 14 is a block diagram showing a system for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be tested according to a third embodiment of the present invention;

图15是根据本发明第三实施例的可选的照明控制方法的流程图;Figure 15 is a flow chart of an alternative lighting control method in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention;

图16是根据本发明第三实施例的可选的用户软件界面的示意图; 16 is a schematic diagram of an optional user software interface in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention;

图17是根据本发明第三实施例的皮包的反射率数据分布示意图;Figure 17 is a diagram showing the distribution of reflectance data of a purse according to a third embodiment of the present invention;

图18是根据本发明第三实施例的D65的光谱分布示意图;Figure 18 is a schematic diagram showing the spectral distribution of D65 according to a third embodiment of the present invention;

图19是根据本发明第三实施例的灯具四通道光谱分布示意图;Figure 19 is a schematic view showing a four-channel spectral distribution of a lamp according to a third embodiment of the present invention;

图20是根据本发明第三实施例的皮包在四通道灯下的色域示意图;Figure 20 is a gamut diagram of a purse under a four-channel lamp in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention;

图21是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制方法的流程图;Figure 21 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图22是根据本发明第四实施例的标准漫反射体的颜色坐标与目标颜色样本坐标的关系图;Figure 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the color coordinates of a standard diffuse reflector and the coordinates of a target color sample according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图23是根据本发明第四实施例的ANSI78.377标准规定的色温容差四边形的示意图;Figure 23 is a schematic illustration of a color temperature tolerance quadrilateral specified by the ANSI 78.377 standard in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图24是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制方法的流程图;Figure 24 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图25是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 25 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a first embodiment of the present invention;

图26是根据本发明第二实施例的照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 26 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention;

图27是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 27 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention;

图28是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 28 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图29是根据本发明第四实施例的一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 29 is a schematic illustration of an alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图30是根据本发明第四实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 30 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图31是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 31 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图32是根据本发明第五实施例的一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 32 is a schematic illustration of an alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图33是根据本发明第五实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 33 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图34是根据本发明第五实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图;Figure 34 is a schematic illustration of another alternative lighting control apparatus in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention;

图35是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制系统的示意图;Figure 35 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a first embodiment of the present invention;

图36是根据本发明第二实施例的照明控制系统的示意图;Figure 36 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a second embodiment of the present invention;

图37是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制系统的示意图;Figure 37 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a third embodiment of the present invention;

图38是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制系统的示意图;以及Figure 38 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention;

图39是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制系统的示意图。Figure 39 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention.

具体实施方式detailed description

为了使本技术领域的人员更好地理解本发明方案,下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本发明一部分的实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本发明中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都应当属于本发明保护的范围。 The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is an embodiment of the invention, but not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts shall fall within the scope of the present invention.

需要说明的是,本发明的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的本发明的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。It is to be understood that the terms "first", "second" and the like in the specification and claims of the present invention are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not necessarily used to describe a particular order or order. It is to be understood that the data so used may be interchanged where appropriate, so that the embodiments of the invention described herein can be implemented in a sequence other than those illustrated or described herein. In addition, the terms "comprises" and "comprises" and "the" and "the" are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, for example, a process, method, system, product, or device that comprises a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to Those steps or units may include other steps or units not explicitly listed or inherent to such processes, methods, products or devices.

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制方法的方法实施例,需要说明的是,在附图的流程图示出的步骤可以在诸如一组计算机可执行指令的计算机系统中执行,并且,虽然在流程图中示出了逻辑顺序,但是在某些情况下,可以以不同于此处的顺序执行所示出或描述的步骤。In accordance with an embodiment of the present invention, a method embodiment of a lighting control method is provided, it being noted that the steps illustrated in the flowchart of the drawings may be performed in a computer system such as a set of computer executable instructions, and Although a logical order is shown in the flowcharts, in some cases the steps shown or described may be performed in a different order than the ones described herein.

图1是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制方法的流程图,如图1所示,该照明控制方法包括如下步骤:1 is a flow chart of a lighting control method according to a first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the lighting control method includes the following steps:

步骤S102,获取照明体的调光信号;Step S102, acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body;

步骤S104,按照调光信号控制照明体发光。Step S104, controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal.

通过上述步骤,可以实现增强待测物表面颜色饱和度的技术效果,进而解决了现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的技术问题。Through the above steps, the technical effect of enhancing the color saturation of the surface of the object to be tested can be realized, thereby solving the technical problem that the existing lighting control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

实施例1Example 1

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制的方法,图2是根据本发明第二实施例的照明控制方法的流程图,如图2所示,该方法包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method of lighting control is provided, and FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:

步骤S101,接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型。Step S101, receiving a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type.

具体的,用户可以通过交互设备输入上述参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型,上述交互设备可以是一个遥控器,结合图7,用户可以通过使用遥控器对软件界面进行操作。Specifically, the user can input the color temperature of the reference light source, the reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum type of the illuminating body through the interaction device. The interaction device may be a remote controller. In combination with FIG. 7, the user can use the remote controller to use the software interface. Take action.

步骤S103,使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布光谱。Step S103, using the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested is obtained from the memory.

步骤S105,使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到光源各通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供光源。Step S105, using the reference light source color temperature to query the reference light source of the illumination body and the reference light source color coordinate, and querying the spectrum of each channel of the light source from the memory by using the illumination body spectral type, wherein the illumination body provides the light source for the object to be tested.

具体的,可以在存储器中预先存储光源各通道光谱、参考光源、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布光谱,这里需要说明的是,步骤S101中用户输入的参考色温对应上述存储器中的光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和光源各通道光谱。Specifically, the spectrum of each channel of the light source, the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested may be pre-stored in the memory. It should be noted that the reference color temperature input by the user in step S101 corresponds to the above memory. The source spectrum, the reference source color coordinates, and the source channel spectrum.

步骤S107,根据照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和光源各通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;Step S107, calculating the radiant flux according to the reference light source of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body;

步骤S109,将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号。 In step S109, the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.

具体的,上述各颜色通道可以根据上述目标辐通量白光的形式照射待测物,上述待测物的颜色可以以最大化的改变本身的颜色饱和度而且上述待测物周围待测物颜色色调不失真。Specifically, each of the color channels may illuminate the object to be tested according to the target radiant white light, and the color of the object to be tested may be used to maximize the color saturation of the object and the color tone of the object to be tested around the object to be tested. Not distorted.

本申请上述实施例中,使用事先存储的待测待测物表面反射率分布,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光约束为白光,待测物在上述白光的照射下颜色饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩饱和度而且同时使待测物周围待测物颜色失真的问题。In the above embodiment of the present application, the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that the output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light. The color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the object to be tested. The color cannot accurately and quantitatively enhance the color saturation of the object to be tested and at the same time distort the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested.

可选的,步骤S107,根据照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体提供的各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量的步骤可以包括:Optionally, in step S107, the radiant flux calculation is performed according to the reference light source of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel provided by the illuminating body, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body. The steps of the flux can include:

步骤S201,通过计算获取待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo);Step S201, obtaining color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source by calculation;

具体的,上述参考光源可以是用户预先存储在存储器中,也可以是用户实时输入到系统中,这里需要说明的是,上述色坐标(xo,yo)可以是CIE1931 xy色坐标,CIE1960 uv色坐标,CIE1976 Luv色坐标,CIE1976Lab色坐标等。这里采用CIE1931 xy色坐标。Specifically, the reference light source may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time. It should be noted that the color coordinates (x o , y o ) may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960 uv. Color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, etc. Here CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.

步骤S203,通过计算获取待测物在可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000001
Step S203, obtaining color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the tonable light source by calculation
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000001

步骤S205,根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)、待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000002
光源各通道光谱和用户输入的目标饱和度水平建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;Step S205, according to the color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000002
A spectrum of each channel of the light source and a target saturation level input by the user establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body;

步骤S207,根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。Step S207, calculating a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.

具体的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以通过现有的成熟算法得到,上述目标辐通量即全局最优解。Specifically, the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.

可选的,步骤S201,通过计算获取待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)的步骤可以包括:Optionally, in step S201, the step of obtaining the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test by the reference light source may include:

步骤S300,通过如下公式计算得到待测物在参考光源下颜色的三刺激值,分别表示为Xo,Yo,ZoIn step S300, the tristimulus values of the color of the object under the reference light source are calculated by the following formula, which are respectively represented as X o , Y o , Z o .

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000003

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000004

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000005

其中,r(λ)是待测物表面的反射率分布,s(λ)是参考光源光谱,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000006
是CIE人眼三刺激值函数。物体的反射率分布可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种物体的标准反射率分布。参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择,参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。Where r(λ) is the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and s(λ) is the reference source spectrum.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000006
It is a CIE human eye tristimulus value function. The reflectance distribution of the object can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance distribution of the object pre-existing in the memory. The spectrum of the reference source uses the spectrum of a standard illuminator of different color temperatures. The color temperature is selected by the user and the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.

通过色度学的XYZ->CIE1931 xy的转换公式,由物体颜色的三刺激值XYZ转换得到(xo,yo):The conversion formula of XYZ->CIE1931 xy of colorimetry is obtained by converting the tristimulus value XYZ of the object color to (x o , y o ):

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000007

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000008

可选的,步骤S2073,通过计算获取待测物在可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000009
的步骤可以包括:Optionally, in step S2073, the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that can be achieved under the condensable light source is obtained by calculation.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000009
The steps can include:

步骤S401,从存储器中获取参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr);Step S401, obtaining color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source from the memory;

步骤S403,根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo),参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr)、参考光源、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和光源各通道光谱计算出

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000010
Step S403, according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference light source, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source, the reference light source, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the light source. Channel spectrum calculation
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000010

具体地,结合图3所示,图3为由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。上述三角形可以为一个色域,上述色域可以由照明灯提供的光源各通道光谱和待测物表面的反射光谱计算得出,(xo,yo)为待测物在参考光源下的色坐标,(xr,yr)为参考光源的色坐标,由色度学可知,在待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)和参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr)的连线上所有的颜色色相一致,颜色点离参考光源颜色点越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。从图3中可见待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000011
是(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,所以可以根据由(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述色域构建函数计算上述待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000012
这里
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000013
的饱和度增加的水平被认为是100%。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 3 is a coordinate range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points R, G, and B, that is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B. The above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) is the color of the object under test under the reference light source. The coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source. From the colorimetric, the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source and the color coordinates of the reference source (x r , The color of all the colors on the line of y r ) is the same. The farther the color point is from the color point of the reference source, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 3, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source can be seen.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000011
Is the intersection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, so it can be based on the connection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) The color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000012
Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000013
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.

可选的,步骤S205,根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)、待测物在光源下能达到的最大饱和度色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000014
光源各通道光谱和参考光源色坐标建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型,上述计算模型可以包括:Optionally, in step S205, according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000014
The spectrum of each channel of the light source and the color coordinates of the reference source establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body, and the above calculation model may include:

建立至少四个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中所述约束条件包括:Establishing at least four constraints defines the range of values of the radiant flux vector p. The constraints include:

约束条件一:所有颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total flux of all color channels is greater than zero.

约束条件二:各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的色坐标点在(xr,yr)与(xo,yo)的连线上。 Constraint 3: The color coordinate point of the object to be tested is on the line connecting (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ).

约束条件四:灯光的色坐标点在设定的白光区域范围内。Constraint 4: The color coordinate point of the light is within the set white light area.

用d来表示待测物的色坐标与

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000015
的距离。目标方程是最小化d与总光通量的加权和,其中后者作为可选,即可以加在目标方程里也可以不加。Use d to indicate the color coordinates of the object to be tested
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000015
the distance. The objective equation is to minimize the weighted sum of d and total luminous flux, with the latter being optional, either added to the target equation or not.

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过解数学优化问题决定唯一一个令目标方程的值最小的最优解。该过程由建立求解一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, and the only optimal solution that minimizes the value of the objective equation is determined by solving the mathematical optimization problem. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,目标方程的第二项可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的线性或非线性方程。比如所有颜色通道的总光通量,光效,CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the second term of the objective equation can be any linear or nonlinear equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, the total luminous flux, light efficiency, CRI, etc. of all color channels. The process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

其中,各通道的光通量等于该通道的辐通量乘以该通道1w的辐通量转换的光通量。Wherein, the luminous flux of each channel is equal to the luminous flux of the channel multiplied by the luminous flux converted by the radiation flux of the channel 1w.

这里需要说明的是,待测物的色坐标可由待测物反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,照明体各通道相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。It should be noted here that the color coordinates of the object to be tested can be represented by the reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel of the illumination body, and the radiation flux vector p.

具体的,下面结合图3至图5详细描述上述计算模型的推导过程:Specifically, the derivation process of the above calculation model is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5:

实际上当光源有n个颜色通道,在此光源照射下的待测物的颜色可以看作是待测物在光源中每个单色颜色通道的照射下达到的各颜色的混合。因此CIE1931xy色度图上,在只有一个光源的情况下,所能达到的待测物颜色点只能在待测物分别被n个颜色通道照射下的颜色点组成的色域内。同时,当被照待测物反射率和光源光谱确定,此待测物在此光源下的颜色范围也是确定的。比如光源由红绿蓝三种颜色LED组成,R,G,B分别表示被照待测物在红光LED,绿光LED,蓝光LED照射下的颜色值。图3显示由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围。即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。设待测物在参考灯光下颜色的CIE1931xy色坐标为(xo,yo)。由色度学我们可知,在参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的连线上所有的颜色点色相一致。颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000016
表示在此光源下待测物所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点。不难看出点
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000017
应是(xr,yr)和(xo,yo)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,如图3所示。In fact, when the light source has n color channels, the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined. For example, the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Figure 3 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B. Let the CIE1931xy color coordinate of the color of the object under reference light be (x o , y o ). From colorimetry, we can see that all the color points of the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. point
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000016
Indicates the color point at which the object under test can reach maximum saturation. It’s not hard to see
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000017
It should be the intersection of the line of (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, as shown in Fig. 3.

连接参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的直线方程可以表示为:The equation of the line connecting the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) can be expressed as:

y=kx+b  (1)y=kx+b (1)

设我们要优化的颜色点是(x′o,y′o),由于颜色色相要保持不变,因此(x′o,y′o)需要满足式(1)。(x′o,y′o)的表达式为:Let the color point we want to optimize is (x' o , y' o ). Since the color hue should remain unchanged, (x' o , y' o ) needs to satisfy the formula (1). The expression for (x' o , y' o ) is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000018
其中,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000018
among them,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000019

ayo表示

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000020
a yo
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000020

azo表示

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000021
a zo
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000021

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000022
是灯具各通道的相对光谱能量分布。照明体提供的各光源的不同颜色通道的光谱可以由用户事先测得然后输入设备。
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000022
It is the relative spectral energy distribution of each channel of the luminaire. The spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured in advance by the user and then input to the device.

为了增加待测物颜色的饱和度,我们可以通过最小化(x′o,y′o)和

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000023
之间的距离来实现。(x′o,y′o)和
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000024
之间的距离表示为:
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000025
In order to increase the saturation of the color of the object to be tested, we can minimize (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000023
The distance between them is achieved. (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000024
The distance between them is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000025

在大部分场合中灯光色彩被限定为白光。ANSI C78.377标准为8个色温点规定了8个四边形。我们把灯光色彩限定在这些四边形围成的白光区域内,在这里我们对白光区域作分段线性拟合,上述白光区域分段函数的曲线如图4所示。在CIE1931 xy坐标系里,整个白光区域被分成两块,x坐标的取值范围是[xmin,xmid]和[xmid,xmax]。其中白光区域上限的分段线性拟合函数为:In most cases the color of the light is limited to white light. The ANSI C78.377 standard specifies eight quadrilaterals for eight color temperature points. We limit the color of the light to the white light area enclosed by these quadrilaterals. Here we make a piecewise linear fit to the white light area. The curve of the white light area piecewise function is shown in Fig. 4. In the CIE1931 xy coordinate system, the entire white light region is divided into two blocks, and the x-coordinates range from [x min , x mid ] and [x mid , x max ]. The piecewise linear fitting function of the upper limit of the white light region is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000026

白光区域下限的分段线性拟合函数为:The piecewise linear fit function for the lower bound of the white light region is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000027

灯光颜色的xy坐标可以由下式计算。The xy coordinate of the light color can be calculated by the following formula.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000028
其中,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000028
among them,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000029
ay表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000030
az表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000029
a y indicates
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000030
a z indicates
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000031

同时,每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式。Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,nAt the same time, the luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship. Φ ivi ·p i ,i=1,...,n

其中pi是向量p的第i个分量,Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,由下式积分得出。Where p i is the ith component of the vector p, and Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii flux of the i-th channel 1W, which is obtained by integrating the following equation.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000032
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000032

其中,km是个常数,为673。

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000033
是第i个颜色通道的相对光谱分布,v(λ)是人眼明视觉光谱光效分布。因此总光通是
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000034
Where k m is a constant and is 673.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000033
Is the relative spectral distribution of the i-th color channel, and v(λ) is the light-effect distribution of the human visual spectrum. So the total light is
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000034

除了最小化(x′o,y′o)和

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000035
之间的距离,最大化总光通量可以作为另一个目标。因此目标方程是两个目标表达式的加权和,优化问题模型表示如下。In addition to minimizing (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000035
The distance between the maximal total luminous flux can be another target. Therefore the objective equation is the weighted sum of the two target expressions, and the optimization problem model is expressed as follows.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000036
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000036

s.t.  [1,…,1]p>0,S.t. [1,...,1]p>0,

Φvi·pi≤Φi,max,i=1,2,…,n,Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max ,i=1,2,...,n,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000037

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000038

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000039
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000039

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000040
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000040

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000041
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000041

s.t.  [1,…,1]p>0,S.t. [1,...,1]p>0,

Φvi·pi≤Φi,max,i=1,2,…,n,Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max ,i=1,2,...,n,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000042
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000042

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000043
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000043

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000044

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000045
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000045

色坐标其中λ表示权重,Φi,max表示第i个颜色通道最大的光通量。约束条件中[1,…,1]p>0限定光源的总辐通量必须大于0,Φvi·pi≤Φi,max限定各颜色通道的光通量不能大于该颜色通道的最大光通量。

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000046
表示新产生的物体颜色仍然需要满足式(1)。后面的三个不等式限定灯光的色坐标在线性拟合的白光区域内。分别解以上两个式子,比较f1和f2的值,两个目标方程的较小值对应的最优解即是最优辐射通量。The color coordinates where λ represents the weight, and Φ i,max represents the maximum luminous flux of the i-th color channel. In the constraint [1,...,1]p>0, the total radiant flux of the light source must be greater than 0, Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max defines that the luminous flux of each color channel cannot be greater than the maximum luminous flux of the color channel.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000046
It means that the color of the newly generated object still needs to satisfy the formula (1). The latter three inequalities define the color coordinates of the light within a linearly fitted white light region. Solve the above two equations and compare the values of f 1 and f 2 . The optimal solution corresponding to the smaller values of the two objective equations is the optimal radiant flux.

得到各颜色通道的辐通量最优解后,各个通道的光通量Φi可由Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n计算得出。由发光体的特性可由Φi计算每个颜色通道的调光信号。比如LED芯片在稳定的状态下电流值与光通量成正比关系,由事先标定的比例系数可由Φi计算出第i个通道的电流值。以上介绍的方法流程如图5所示。After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux of each color channel, the luminous flux Φ i of each channel can be calculated by Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n. The dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from Φ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the current value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the Φ i by the scale factor previously calibrated. The method flow described above is shown in Figure 5.

通过本发明实施例的分析,可以获知本申请欲保护的核心创新点包括:Through the analysis of the embodiments of the present invention, it can be known that the core innovation points to be protected by the present application include:

一种通过优化光源输出光的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱分布和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据某一设定参考灯光颜色,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强。同时系统输出光是白光,同时,根据所选参考灯光色温全自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。在光源光谱合适的情况下,可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色饱和度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。系统输出光是白光,不会使被照物周围待测物颜色失真。A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source. The system and method obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested. The color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced. At the same time, the output light of the system is white light. At the same time, the spectrum of the illumination source is fully adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature, and the operation is simple. In the case where the spectrum of the light source is suitable, the effect of the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested can be accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light. The output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.

下面就本申请的实施方案在具体应用场景下的应用进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application of the implementation of the present application in a specific application scenario:

一个典型实施例的系统如图6所示。用户事先测照明灯具中每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。待测物表面的反射率数据可以是出厂预设的标准反射率数据或者用户实时测得的反射率,也存在存储器中。同时,参考光源分布也存在存储器当中。在使用时,用户指定使用哪种待测物反射率数据,灯具光谱类型和参考光源色温,由用户界面将信息传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据,参考光源和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器实现如下算法,计算出调光信号传给光源的各颜色通道。A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG. The user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory. The reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory. At the same time, the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory. In use, the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source. The controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。 The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.

照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备,不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。图7为用户输入上述参考光源的软件界面。一旦用户选定参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如表格1所示,表格1为待测物在不同色温的光源下的色坐标。The spectrum of each color channel of the lighting fixture is measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light source uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.

表格1:待测物在不同色温的光源下的xy色坐标Table 1: xy color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000047
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000047

以皮包为例,带白光约束的增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图7所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图9和图10所示。1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 7. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图11所示。其中色域由三角形围出,白光区域为三角形内的四边形表示。R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, and the white light region is represented by a quadrangle within a triangle. R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3127, 0.3290), O represents the color coordinate point of the bag under the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O * represents the bag under the lighting fixture. The color point that reaches the maximum saturation, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.建立优化问题。这里k=0.2567,b=0.2487,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。3. Establish optimization issues. Here k = 0.2067, b = 0.2487, the luminous flux converted to the 1W radiant flux of the four channels is [311, 174, 482, 46.4] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] ( Corresponding to WRGB).

4.解优化问题得最优解辐通量向量为[1.6665,0,0.2643,0.3794](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(88%,0%,98%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。优化得到的待测物颜色点的色坐标是(0.3668,0.3429),在图11中用O‘表示,优化得到的灯光颜色点的色坐标是(0.3351,0.3345),在图11中用L表示。可以看到灯光颜色点在白光区域的边界上。 4. The optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.

根据以上流程可以得到被照物体在不同参考光源下优化得到的PWM值,表格2以6500K参考光源为例,给出表1中四个物体对应的颜色增强之后的颜色色坐标,灯光色坐标,灯具PWM驱动信号。According to the above process, the PWM value obtained by the illuminated object under different reference light sources can be obtained. Table 2 takes the reference light source of 6500K as an example, and gives the color color coordinates and the light color coordinates of the four objects corresponding to the objects in Table 1. Lamp PWM drive signal.

表格1:对应不同物体在6500K参考光源下的优化结果Table 1: Optimization results for different objects under 6500K reference source

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000048
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000048

实施例2Example 2

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制的方法,图12是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制方法的流程图,如图12所示,该方法包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, a method of lighting control is provided, and FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 12, the method includes:

步骤S101,接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d。Step S101, receiving an identification mark of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user.

具体的,上述身份识别标志可以置于待测物的表面,可以是条形码或二维码,每个身份识别标志对应一个待测物,上述目标饱和度d可以是待测物表面颜色的饱和度,可以是用户期望通过照明体的照射,待测物表面的颜色所达到的颜色饱和度。可以采用实施例三中的传感器通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,身份识别标志关联待测物。Specifically, the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested. The sensor in Embodiment 3 can be used to transmit an identification flag to the controller by sensing, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.

步骤S103,使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布光谱。Step S103, using the identification mark to query the memory to obtain the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested.

步骤S105,使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供光源。Step S105: Query the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the color coordinate of the reference light source, and the color channel spectrum of the illuminating body by using the reference light source color temperature, wherein the illuminating body provides the light source for the object to be tested.

具体的,可以采用实施例三中的存储器预先存储光源各颜色通道光谱、参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布,这里需要说明的是,步骤S101中用户输入的参考色温对应上述存储器中的光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和光源各颜色通道光谱。Specifically, the memory in the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested. The reference input by the user in step S101 is described. The color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source.

步骤S107,根据目标饱和度d、上述相应的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量。Step S107, calculating the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body. the amount.

步骤S109,将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号。 In step S109, the target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.

具体的,上述各光源通道以上述辐通量照射待测物,上述待测物的颜色可以满足上述目标饱和度d。Specifically, each of the light source channels illuminates the object to be tested with the radiant flux, and the color of the object to be tested can satisfy the target saturation d.

本申请上述实施例中,使用事先存储的被照待测物表面反射率,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光的照射下,待测物在参考灯光下的颜色的饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩的问题。In the above embodiment of the present application, the surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body so that under the illumination of the output light of the illuminating body, The saturation of the color of the object under test light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the color of the object to be tested. The problem of the color of the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately enhanced.

可选的,步骤S107,根据目标饱和度d、上述相应的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量的步骤还可以包括:Optionally, in step S107, the radiant flux is calculated according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source. The steps of the target radiant flux may also include:

步骤S201,通过计算获取目标色坐标,其中,目标色坐标是待测物达到目标饱和度d时所呈现的色坐标。Step S201, obtaining target color coordinates by calculation, wherein the target color coordinates are color coordinates presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d.

步骤S203,根据目标色坐标建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型。Step S203, a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is established according to the target color coordinate.

步骤S205,根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。Step S205, calculating a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.

具体的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以通过现有的成熟算法得到,上述目标辐通量即全局最优解。Specifically, the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.

可选的,步骤S201,通过计算获取目标色坐标的步骤包括:Optionally, in step S201, the step of obtaining the target color coordinate by calculation includes:

步骤S301,计算出待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)。In step S301, the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the spectrum of the reference light source are calculated.

具体的,上述参考光源光谱可以是用户预先存储在存储器中,也可以是用户实时输入到系统中,这里需要说明的是,上述色坐标可以是CIE1931 xy色坐标,CIE1960 uv色坐标,CIE1976 Luv色坐标,CIE1976Lab色坐标等。这里采用CIE1931 xy色坐标。Specifically, the reference light source spectrum may be stored in the memory by the user in advance, or may be input into the system by the user in real time. It should be noted that the color coordinates may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960 uv color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color. Coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, etc. Here CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.

步骤S303,计算出待测物在光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000049
Step S303, calculating color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000049

步骤S305,根据待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)、最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000050
和目标饱和度d计算出目标色坐标(x’o,y’o)。Step S305, according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the spectrum of the reference light source, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000050
The target color coordinate (x' o , y' o ) is calculated with the target saturation d.

可选的,步骤S301中计算出待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)的步骤可以包括:Optionally, the step of calculating the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference light source spectrum in step S301 may include:

步骤S400,通过如下公式计算得到待测物在参考光源下颜色的三刺激值,分别表示为Xo,Yo,ZoIn step S400, the tristimulus values of the color of the object under the reference light source are calculated by the following formula, which are represented as X o , Y o , Z o , respectively.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000051
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000051

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000052
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000052

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000053
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000053

其中,r(λ)是待测物表面的反射率分布,s(λ)是参考光源光谱,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000054
是CIE人眼三刺激值函数。待测物的反射率分布可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率分布。参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择,参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。Where r(λ) is the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and s(λ) is the reference source spectrum.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000054
It is a CIE human eye tristimulus value function. The reflectance distribution of the test object can be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance distribution of the test object previously stored in the memory can be used. The spectrum of the reference source uses the spectrum of a standard illuminator of different color temperatures. The color temperature is selected by the user and the spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user.

通过色度学的XYZ->CIE1931 xy的转换公式,由待测物颜色的三刺激值XYZ转换得到(xo,yo).Through the conversion formula of XYZ->CIE1931 xy of colorimetry, the tristimulus value XYZ of the color of the object to be tested is converted to (x o , y o ).

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000055
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000055

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000056
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000056

可选的,步骤S303,计算出待测物在可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000057
的步骤包括:Optionally, in step S303, calculating a color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the condensable light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000057
The steps include:

步骤S501,从存储器中获取参考光源光谱色坐标(xr,yr)。Step S501, obtaining reference spectral color coordinates (x r , y r ) from the memory.

步骤S503,根据待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)、参考光源光谱的色坐标(xr,yr)、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱计算出待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000058
Step S503, according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test in the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference source spectrum, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the color channels of the light source. The spectrum calculates the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000058

具体的,结合图13所示,图13为由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。上述三角形可以为一个色域,上述色域可以由照明灯提供的光源各颜色通道光谱和待测物表面的反射光谱计算得出,(xo,yo)为待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标,(xr,yr)为参考光源光谱的色坐标,由色度学可知,在待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)和参考光源光谱的色坐标(xr,yr)的连线上所有的颜色色相一致,颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。从图13中可见待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000059
是(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,所以可以根据由(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述色域构建函数计算上述待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000060
这里
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000061
的饱和度增加的水平被认为是100%。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 , FIG. 13 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating a color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B. The above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each color channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) for the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum The color coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source spectrum. From the colorimetric, the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum and the color of the reference source spectrum are known. All the colors of the lines on the coordinates (x r , y r ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 13, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference light source can be seen.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000059
Is the intersection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, so it can be based on the connection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) The color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000060
Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000061
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.

可选的,步骤S305中的根据待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)和最大饱和度的色坐标以及目标饱和度d计算出目标色坐标(x′o,y′o)的步骤可以包括:Optionally, in step S305, the target color coordinate ( x′o , y is calculated according to the color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test and the color coordinate of the maximum saturation and the target saturation d. The steps of ' o ) may include:

步骤S601,通过如下公式计算得到目标色坐标(x′o,y′o),Step S601, the target color coordinates calculated by the following equation (x 'o, y' o ),

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000062
其中,d是目标饱和度。
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000062
Where d is the target saturation.

具体的,d为可以用户期望增加的饱和度水平,可以用百分数表示。Specifically, d is a saturation level that can be expected by the user and can be expressed as a percentage.

可选的,步骤S203,根据目标色坐标建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型可以包括:Optionally, in step S203, the calculation model for establishing the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body according to the target color coordinate may include:

建立三个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定,其中上述约束条件包括:Three constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiation flux vector p, wherein the above constraints include:

约束条件一:照明体各颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.

约束条件二:照明体各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的在照明体提供的可调色光源下的色坐标(x,y)向量能够与(x′o,y′o)进行匹配。Constraint 3: The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object to be tested under the tonable light source provided by the illuminant can be matched with (x' o , y' o ).

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过建立最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量的目标在限定的取值范围内寻找最优解。该过程由建立求解一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,这里目标可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的线性或非线性目标方程。比如最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量,最大化光效,最大化CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the target here can be any linear or nonlinear target equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc. The process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

具体的,上述计算模型可通过下列描述推导得出:Specifically, the above calculation model can be derived by the following description:

每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式:The luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship:

Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,nΦ ivi ·p i ,i=1,...,n

其中pi是向量p的第i个分量,Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,由下式积分得出。Where p i is the ith component of the vector p, and Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii flux of the i-th channel 1W, which is obtained by integrating the following equation.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000063
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000063

其中,km是个常数,为673。

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000064
是第i个颜色通道的相对光谱分布,v(λ)是人眼明视觉光谱光效分布。这里需要说明的是,上述照明体提供的各光源的不同颜色通道的光谱可以由用户事先测得然后输入设备。Where k m is a constant and is 673.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000064
Is the relative spectral distribution of the i-th color channel, and v(λ) is the light-effect distribution of the human visual spectrum. It should be noted here that the spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the above illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device.

因此最大化

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000065
即可得目标方程。Maximize
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000065
The target equation can be obtained.

令Φvi·pi小于等于第i个通道的最大光通量,即可得到第二个约束条件。Let Φ vi ·p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.

同时,由现有的色度学公式,在一个照明体下的待测物表面颜色的CIE1931 xy坐标可以表示为: At the same time, from the existing colorimetric formula, the CIE1931 xy coordinate of the surface color of the object under test under an illuminating body can be expressed as:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000066
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000066

其中,向量ax表示

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000067
向量ay表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000068
向量az表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000069
如果光源有n个颜色通道,则p,ax,ay,az都是n×1的向量。Where vector a x is represented
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000067
Vector a y
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000068
Vector a z
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000069
If the source has n color channels, then p, a x , a y , and a z are all n × 1 vectors.

它和目标色坐标(x′o,y′o)之间的距离由Δxy来表示。Δxy的定义如下。The distance between it and the target color coordinates (x 'o, y' o ) is represented by Δxy. The definition of Δxy is as follows.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000070
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000070

代入式(1-2),式(3)可以变成:Substituting (1-2), equation (3) can become:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000071
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000071

其中,among them,

k1=(1-x′o)ax-x′o ay-x′o azk 1 =(1-x' o )a x -x' o a y -x' o a z ,

k2=-y′o ax+(1-y′o)ay-y′o azk 2 =-y' o a x +(1-y' o )a y -y' o a z ,

k3=ax+ay+azk 3 = a x + a y + a z .

观察公式(4)可知令分式的分子等于0即可,即

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000072
此时,我们可以设立另一个目标来建立优化问题。这里我们以最大化光通量为优化目标为例,优化问题可以建立为Observe equation (4) to know that the numerator of the order is equal to 0, that is,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000072
At this point, we can set another goal to build optimization problems. Here we take the optimization of the luminous flux as an example, and the optimization problem can be established as

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000073
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000073

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000074
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000074

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000075
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000075

其中Φi,max表示第i个颜色通道最大的光通量。约束条件一[1,…,1]p>0限定光源 的总辐通量必须大于0,约束条件二Φvi·pi≤Φi,max限定各颜色通道的光通量不能大于该颜色通道的最大光通量,约束条件三

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000076
限定待测物的色坐标xy向量能够与(x’o,y’o)进行匹配,优化问题的形式是线性优化问题,这种优化问题可以通过现有的成熟算法得到全局最优解。Where Φ i,max represents the maximum luminous flux of the i-th color channel. The constraint one [1,...,1]p>0 defines that the total radiant flux of the light source must be greater than 0, and the constraint condition Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max defines that the luminous flux of each color channel cannot be greater than the maximum of the color channel. Luminous flux, constraint three
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000076
The color coordinate xy vector that defines the object to be tested can be matched with (x' o , y' o ). The form of the optimization problem is a linear optimization problem. This optimization problem can obtain the global optimal solution through the existing mature algorithm.

下面就本申请在具体应用场景下进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application in a specific application scenario:

这个发明专利包括以下方法和步骤:This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:

本系统包括一个颜色可调光源,传感器,存储器和控制器。光源中包含二种或二种以上颜色的发光体,比如发光二级管(LED)。光源中的每组同色发光体用同一个电流或电压信号控制。在这里称光源中一个或多个相同颜色的发光体为一个颜色通道。The system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller. The light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.

事先测得待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源中每个颜色通道的光谱分布。待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。目标待测物表面有身份识别标志,比如条形码,传感器通过感应身份识别标志将信号传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器接收用户传来的参考灯光色温值和期望增加的饱和度水平,然后在存储器中调出相应的参考灯光光谱,实现如下算法,最后计算出调光信号传给光源的各颜色通道。系统框图如图14所示。The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance. The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory. The surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory. The controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the color channels that the dimming signal transmits to the light source. The system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.

根据现有色度学公式,对于在一个照明体下的待测物,它表面颜色的三刺激值CIE XYZ可由待测物表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,各通路相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, for a test object under a illuminating body, the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the spokes. The flux vector p is represented.

根据现有色度学公式,可将CIE XYZ的表达式转换成CIE1931 xy色坐标的表达式。实际上当光源有n个颜色通道,在此光源照射下的待测物的颜色可以看作是待测物在光源中每个单色颜色通道的照射下达到的各颜色的混合。因此CIE1931xy色度图上,在只有一个光源的情况下,所能达到的待测物颜色点只能在待测物分别被n个颜色通道照射下的颜色点组成的色域内。同时,当被照待测物反射率和光源光谱确定,此待测物在此光源下的颜色范围也是确定的。比如光源由红绿蓝三种颜色LED组成,R,G,B分别表示被照待测物在白光LED,红光LED,绿光LED,蓝光LED照射下的颜色值。图13显示由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围。即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。设待测物在参考灯光下颜色的CIE1931xy色坐标为(xo,yo),将参考灯光光谱能量分布和待测物反射率分布代入式(1-5)则可得到(xo,yo)。由色度学我们可知,在参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的连线上所有的颜色点色相一致。颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000077
表示在此光源下待测物所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点。不难看出点
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000078
应是(xr,yr)和(xo,yo)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,如图13所示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates. In fact, when the light source has n color channels, the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined. For example, the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B. Let the CIE1931xy color coordinate of the object under the reference light be (x o , y o ), and substitute the reference light spectral energy distribution and the reflectance distribution of the test object into the formula (1-5) to obtain (x o , y o ). From colorimetry, we can see that all the color points of the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. point
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000077
Indicates the color point at which the object under test can reach maximum saturation. It’s not hard to see
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000078
It should be the intersection of the line of (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, as shown in FIG.

这里点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000079
的饱和度增加的水平被认为为100%。设d为期望增加的饱和度水 平,用百分数表示。设期望达到的颜色色坐标为(x’o,y’o),则(x’o,y’o)可以用下式计算。Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000079
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%. Let d be the desired level of saturation, expressed as a percentage. Let the color coordinate coordinates expected to be (x' o , y' o ), then (x' o , y' o ) can be calculated by the following formula.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000080
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000080

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000081
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000081

建立三个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中所述约束条件包括:Three constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p. The constraints include:

约束条件一:照明体各颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.

约束条件二:照明体各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的在照明体提供的光源下的色坐标(x,y)向量能够与(x′o,y′o)进行匹配。Constraint 3: The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过建立最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量的目标在限定的取值范围内寻找最优解。该过程由建立一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,这里目标可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的目标方程。比如最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量,最大化光效,最大化CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc. The process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式:Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n其中Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,pi是向量p的第i个分量。The luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship: Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n where Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W, p i is the ith component of the vector p.

因此最大化

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000082
即可得目标方程。Maximize
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000082
The target equation can be obtained.

令Φvi·pi小于等于第i个通道的最大光通量,即可得到第二个约束条件。Let Φ vi ·p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.

同时,由现有的色度学公式,在一个照明体下的待测物表面颜色的xy色坐标向量可由待测物表面反射函数,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,该照明体各通道的相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。令该xy色坐标表达式等于目标色坐标向量(x’o,y’o),即可得到第三个约束条件。得到各颜色通道的辐通量最优解后,各个通道的光通量Φi可由Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n计算得出。由发光体的特性可由Φi计算每个颜色通道的调光信号。比如LED芯片在稳定的状态下电流值与光通量成正比关系,由事先标定的比例系数可由Φi计算出第i个通道的调光信号值。以上介绍的方法流程图 见图15。具体为:At the same time, from the existing colorimetric formula, the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body The spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented. Let the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained. After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux of each color channel, the luminous flux Φ i of each channel can be calculated by Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n. The dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from Φ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the Φ i by the scale factor previously calibrated. The flow chart of the method described above is shown in Figure 15. Specifically:

步骤10,接收用户传来的参考光源色温和期望增加的饱和度水平。Step 10: Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.

步骤20,调出待测物反射率光谱,光源各颜色通道光谱和参考光源光谱。In step 20, the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.

步骤30,计算待测物在参考灯光下的最大饱和度颜色点的坐标值。Step 30: Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.

步骤40,根据期望增加的饱和度水平计算出目标颜色点的坐标值。In step 40, the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.

步骤50,建立求解优化问题14,求得各通道辐通量。In step 50, a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.

步骤60,将各通道辐通量转化成各通道的调光信号。In step 60, the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.

本发明欲保护的核心创新点包括:The core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:

一种通过调节照明光源的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱,参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据用户期望的饱和度增加水平,建立线性优化问题,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强的同时颜色色相不发生改变A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source. The system and method obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone. The light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.

本发明具有以下优点:The invention has the following advantages:

根据所选参考灯光色温和期望饱和度增加水平自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色鲜艳度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。The spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple. The effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.

下面以皮包在照明灯下为例进行详细阐述:The following is a detailed description of the bag under the lighting:

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备。不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。如图16所示,图16可以为用户选择照明体色温参考光源光谱的软件界面示意图。The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory. The spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device. The spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. As shown in FIG. 16, FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.

一旦用户选定参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如下表格3所示,表格3是皮包在不同参考光源下达到的色坐标。Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.

表格3:待测物在不同色温的光源下的真实颜色Table 3: True color of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000083
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000083

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000084
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000084

新的目标颜色是在待测物的真实颜色的基础上由饱和度增加水平d得到,这里d的数值范围由0%-100%,由用户决定。The new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0% to 100%, which is determined by the user.

以皮包为例,增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图17所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图18和图19所示。1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图20所示。其中色域由三角形围出,R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference light source, the coordinates are (0.3127, 0.3290), and O represents the color coordinate point of the leather bag under the D65 reference light source, and the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O * represents The color point of the bag that can reach the maximum saturation under this lighting fixture, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.设用户界面传来的饱和度水平为20%,目标颜色点等于[0.3455,0.3374]+([0.5783,0.3972]-[0.3455,0.3374])*0.2=[0.3920,0.3494]。3. Set the saturation level from the user interface to 20%, and the target color point to be equal to [0.3455, 0.3374] + ([0.5783, 0.3972] - [0.3455, 0.3374]) * 0.2 = [0.3920, 0.3494].

4.根据目标颜色点的色坐标计算k1,k2,k3,建立优化问题(14)。这里,4. Calculate k 1 , k 2 , k 3 according to the color coordinates of the target color point, and establish an optimization problem (14). Here,

k1=[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757]T,k 1 =[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,

k2=[0.2602,-0.27000,-1.6757,-2.5521]T,k 2 = [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,

k3=[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643]T,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。k 3 =[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T , the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).

5.解优化问题(14)得最优解辐通量向量为[0.6621,0.0578,0.1062,0.1311](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(99%,40%,100%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。5. Solution optimization problem (14) The optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).

据以上流程可以得到待测物在不同参考光源下不同饱和度水平对应的PWM值,这里以6500K参考光源为例,给出表3中四个待测物在四个不同饱和度水平下对应的PWM值According to the above process, the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained. Here, taking the 6500K reference light source as an example, the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value

表格4:对应不同待测物在6500K参考光源下不同饱和度水平的PWM调光信号Table 4: PWM dimming signals at different saturation levels for different DUTs under 6500K reference source

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000085
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000085

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000086
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000086

实施例3Example 3

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制方法,需要说明的是,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图21是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制方法的流程图,如图21所示,该方法包括如下的步骤S101至步骤S104:According to an embodiment of the present invention, a lighting control method is provided. It should be noted that the color tunable light source in this embodiment is equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. 21 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 21, the method includes the following steps S101 to S104:

步骤S101,确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色。Step S101, determining a target light color temperature value and a target color.

确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色。确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色具体实现方法有很多,例如,通过接收用户输入的目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色。Determine the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to enhance. There are many ways to determine the target light color temperature value and the target color. For example, the target light color temperature value and the target color are determined by receiving the target light color temperature value and the target color input by the user.

步骤S102,在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据。Step S102, searching for data of the dimming signal corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color in the preset database.

在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据。具体地,将上述确定的目标灯光色温值和目标颜色输入预设数据库,获取预设数据库中目标灯光色温值和目标颜色与调光信号数据之间的映射关系,通过该映射关系,获取目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据。通过在预设数据库中直接查找到目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据。不需要通过大量数据计算得到调光信号数据,此步骤提升了增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。The dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors. Specifically, the target light color temperature value and the target color determined above are input into a preset database, and a mapping relationship between the target light color temperature value and the target color and the dimming signal data in the preset database is obtained, and the target light is acquired through the mapping relationship. The color temperature value corresponds to the dimming signal data of the target color. The dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is directly found in the preset database. It is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data through a large amount of data, and this step improves the processing speed of enhancing the color of the target object.

优选地,在本发明实施例提供的照明控制方法中,可以从以下方式得到预设数据库:创建优化方程,其中,优化方程用于计算辐通量,辐通量是表示颜色可调光源辐射强弱的物理量;对优化方程执行计算处理,得到辐通量的最优解;根据辐通量的最优解,得到调光信号数据;创建预设数据库,其中,数据库用于存储调光信号数据。通过优化方程计算出辐通量的最优解,由辐通量的最优解得到调光信号数据,创建预设数据库,预设数据库用于存储调光信号数据。Preferably, in the illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, a preset database may be obtained from: creating an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is used to calculate the radiation flux, and the radiation flux is indicative of the color tunable light source radiation intensity Weak physical quantity; perform computational processing on the optimization equation to obtain the optimal solution of the radiant flux; obtain the dimming signal data according to the optimal solution of the radiant flux; create a preset database, wherein the database is used to store the dimming signal data . The optimal solution of the radiant flux is calculated by the optimization equation, and the dimming signal data is obtained from the optimal solution of the radiant flux to create a preset database, and the preset database is used to store the dimming signal data.

具体地,可以从以下方式创建优化方程:创建目标方程,其中,目标方程是由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的反射率数据、颜色可调光源的相对光谱和辐通量创建的方程;创建约束方程,其中,约束方程是由标准光源的光谱、目标灯光色温值、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的反射率数据、所述目标颜色样本的对比颜色样本的反射率数据、颜色可调光源的相对光谱和辐通量创建的方程;通过目标方程和约束方程创建优化方程。Specifically, an optimization equation can be created by creating a target equation, wherein the target equation is a spectrum of a standard light source, a tristimulus value function of a human eye, a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, a reflectance data of a target color sample, An equation created by the relative spectra and radiances of a color tunable light source; creating a constraint equation, where the constraint equation is the spectrum of the standard source, the color temperature of the target light, the tristimulus value of the human eye, and the reflectance data of the standard diffuse reflector The reflectivity data of the target color sample, the reflectance data of the contrast color sample of the target color sample, the relative spectrum of the color tunable light source, and the equation created by the radiant flux; the optimization equation is created by the target equation and the constraint equation.

具体地,可以由以下方式创建目标方程,由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数 和标准漫反射体的反射率数据计算第一坐标,其中,第一坐标是标准漫反射体在标准光源下颜色坐标;由颜色可调光源的相对光谱、人眼三刺激值函数、目标颜色样本的反射率数据和辐通量计算目标颜色样本的坐标表达式;根据第一坐标和目标颜色样本的坐标表达式,创建目标方程。Specifically, the target equation can be created by the spectrum of the standard light source and the three-stimulus value function of the human eye. Calculating the first coordinate with the reflectance data of the standard diffuse reflector, wherein the first coordinate is the color coordinate of the standard diffuse body under the standard light source; the relative spectrum of the color tunable light source, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the target color sample The reflectance data and the radiance flux calculate a coordinate expression of the target color sample; the target equation is created based on the first coordinate and the coordinate expression of the target color sample.

通过目标灯光色温值,确定在目标灯光色温下的标准光源,在颜色可调光源下目标颜色样本的u’v’坐标可以用目标颜色样本表面反射光谱,人眼三刺激值函数,颜色可调光源的相对光谱分布和辐通量来表示,目标颜色样本的坐标表达式即如公式(1)和(2)所示:Through the target light color temperature value, the standard light source at the target light color temperature is determined. Under the color adjustable light source, the u'v' coordinate of the target color sample can be reflected by the target color sample surface reflection spectrum, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the color is adjustable. The relative spectral distribution of the light source and the radiant flux indicate that the coordinate expression of the target color sample is as shown in equations (1) and (2):

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000087
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000087

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000088
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000088

其中,λ是波长,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000089
是人眼三刺激值函数,r(λ)是目标颜色样本表面光谱反射率,s(λ)是颜色可调光源的相对光谱能量分布,P是辐通量,如果光源有n个颜色通道,则p是n×1的向量。pT表示光源的辐通量向量的矩阵转置。Where λ is the wavelength,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000089
Is the human eye tristimulus value function, r (λ) is the spectral reflectance of the target color sample surface, s (λ) is the relative spectral energy distribution of the color tunable light source, P is the radiant flux, if the light source has n color channels, Then p is an n × 1 vector. p T represents the matrix transpose of the radiant flux vector of the source.

目标颜色样体在标准光源下的颜色的u’v’坐标用(u′o,v′o)来表示,同理,(u′o,v′o)可以由目标颜色样本表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,以及标准光源的光谱分布计算得到。Color target color samples under standardized light source u'v 'coordinates (u' o, v 'o ) is represented. Similarly, (u' o, v 'o ) of the target color may be reflectance spectrum of the sample surface, The CIE human eye tristimulus value function, as well as the spectral distribution of the standard source, is calculated.

令(u′n,v′n)表示一个标准漫反射体在标准光源下颜色的坐标点,即第一坐标。第一坐标可以由目标颜色样本表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,以及标准光源的光谱分布计算得到。(u′o,v′o)与(u′n,v′n)关系在CIE u’v’坐标关系示意图,如图22所示。Let (u' n , v' n ) denote the coordinate point of the color of a standard diffuse reflector under a standard light source, ie the first coordinate. The first coordinate can be calculated from the target color sample surface reflectance spectrum, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the spectral distribution of the standard light source. (u 'o, v' o ) and the relationship (u 'n, v' n ) in the CIE u'v 'coordinate relationship diagram shown in Figure 22.

颜色点(u′o,v′o)的饱和度由S表示。则

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000090
为了增强在目标灯光色温下的光源下目标物体的目标颜色,需要最大化目标样本颜色的S值,即最大化目标样本颜色的u’v’坐标与(u′n,v′n)的距离。根据第一坐标(u′n,v′n)和目标颜色样本的坐标表达式,创建目标方程。得到目标方程如下: A color point (u 'o, v' o ) of the saturation is represented by S. then
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000090
In order to enhance the target color of the target object under the light source at the target light color temperature, it is necessary to maximize the S value of the target sample color, that is, to maximize the distance between the u'v' coordinate of the target sample color and (u' n , v' n ) . The target equation is created based on the first coordinate (u' n , v' n ) and the coordinate expression of the target color sample. Get the target equation as follows:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000091
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000091

具体地,可以由以下方式创建约束方程:由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数和标准漫反射体的反射率数据计算第一坐标,其中,第一坐标是标准漫反射体在标准光源下的颜色坐标;由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数和目标颜色样本的反射率数据计算第二坐标,其中,第二坐标是目标颜色样本在标准光源下的颜色坐标;由颜色可调光源的相对光谱、人眼三刺激值函数、目标颜色样本的反射率数据和辐通量计算目标颜色样本的坐标表达式;根据第一坐标、第二坐标和目标颜色样本的坐标表达式,创建第一约束方程;由颜色可调光源的光谱、标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数和目标颜色样本的对比颜色样本的反射率数据,创建目标颜色样本的对比颜色样本的第二约束方程;由颜色可调光源的光谱、目标灯光色温值和人眼三刺激值函数创建第三约束方程;根据第一约束方程、第二约束方程和第三约束方程,创建约束方程。Specifically, the constraint equation can be created by calculating a first coordinate from a spectrum of a standard light source, a human eye tristimulus value function, and a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, wherein the first coordinate is a standard diffuse reflector at a standard light source The lower color coordinate; the second coordinate is calculated from the spectrum of the standard light source, the human eye tristimulus value function, and the reflectance data of the target color sample, wherein the second coordinate is the color coordinate of the target color sample under the standard light source; a relative expression of the light source, a tristimulus value function of the human eye, a reflectance data of the target color sample, and a coordinate expression of the target color sample of the target color sample; according to the first coordinate, the second coordinate, and the coordinate expression of the target color sample, Creating a first constraint equation; creating a second constraint of the contrast color sample of the target color sample from the spectrum of the color tunable light source, the spectrum of the standard light source, the tristimulus value function of the human eye, and the reflectance data of the contrast color sample of the target color sample Equation; created by the color-tuned source spectrum, the target light color temperature value, and the human eye tristimulus value function Beam equation; constraint equation based on the first, second and third constraint equation constraint equation constraint equation created.

具体地,根据CIE1976 L*u*v*坐标系的定义,图22中第一坐标(u′n,v′n)与第二坐标(u′o,v′o)的连线的斜率表示目标颜色样本(u′o,v′o)的色调角。同时为了保证灯光渲染质量,需要保证新渲染的物体颜色的色调不变。设第一坐标(u′n,v′n)和(u′o,v′o)的连线方程为:In particular, according to the definition of CIE1976 L * u * v * coordinates, the slope of the first wiring 22 in FIG coordinate (u 'n, v' n ) and a second coordinate (u 'o, v' o ) represents target color samples (u 'o, v' o ) of the hue angle. At the same time, in order to ensure the quality of the lighting rendering, it is necessary to ensure that the color of the newly rendered object color does not change. Let the line equations of the first coordinates (u' n , v' n ) and (u' o , v' o ) be:

v′=ku′+b  (4)v'=ku'+b (4)

即新渲染的目标物体的目标颜色样本的u’v’坐标的坐标点需要满足色调约束方程(4)。That is, the coordinate point of the u'v' coordinate of the target color sample of the newly rendered target object needs to satisfy the tone constraint equation (4).

同时,如果只增加一个样本的颜色饱和度,会使其他样本颜色产生偏移。为了不扭曲其他样本颜色,需要约束目标样本的对比颜色样本的颜色偏移值。令(u′oc,v′oc)表示目标样本的对比颜色样本在标准光源下的颜色坐标,则在优化之后的灯光下对比颜色样本的新颜色点与(u′oc,v′oc)的色差Δu′ v′2不能超过某一个阈值δ。建立色差约束方程如下:At the same time, if you only increase the color saturation of one sample, the other sample colors will be offset. In order not to distort other sample colors, it is necessary to constrain the color offset values of the contrast color samples of the target sample. Let (u' oc , v' oc ) denote the color coordinates of the contrast color sample of the target sample under the standard light source, then compare the new color point of the color sample with (u' oc , v' oc ) under the optimized light The color difference Δu'v' 2 cannot exceed a certain threshold δ. Establish the color difference constraint equation as follows:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000092
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000092

其中,rc代表目标样本的对比颜色样本的表面光谱反射率。为了使颜色可调光源照射出灯光满足目标灯光色温的要求,需要约束灯光的xy色坐标要在ANSI78.377规定的色温容差四边形内。ANSI78.377规定的八个色温容差四边形如图23所示。例如,如果要求色温为6500K,则灯光xy坐标约束在图23如黑粗线框出的四边形内。xy坐标约束方程如下所示:Where r c represents the surface spectral reflectance of the contrast color sample of the target sample. In order for the color tunable light source to illuminate the light to meet the target light color temperature requirements, the xy color coordinate of the constrained light needs to be within the color temperature tolerance quadrilateral specified in ANSI 78.377. The eight color temperature tolerance quadrilaterals specified in ANSI 78.377 are shown in Figure 23. For example, if the color temperature is required to be 6500K, the xy coordinates of the light are constrained in the quadrilateral framed by the thick black line in Fig. 23. The xy coordinate constraint equation is as follows:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000093
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000093

其中,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000094
among them,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000094

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000095
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000095

kl1、ku1、kl2和ku2分别代表直线方程的斜率,bl1、bu1、bl2和bu2分别表示直线方程的截距。k l1 , k u1 , k l2 and k u2 represent the slopes of the linear equations, respectively, and b l1 , b u1 , b l2 and b u2 represent the intercepts of the linear equations, respectively.

由上述目标方程(3)、色调约束方程(4)、色差约束方程(5)和xy坐标约束方程(6)建立优化方程如下所示:The optimization equations are established by the above objective equation (3), the hue constraint equation (4), the color difference constraint equation (5), and the xy coordinate constraint equation (6) as follows:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000096
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000096

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000097
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000097

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000098
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000098

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000099
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000099

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000100
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000100

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000101
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000101

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000102
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000102

其中,公式(7)为目标方程,公式(8)、公式(9)、公式(10)、公式(11)、公式(12)和公式(13)是约束方程。公式(8)为色调约束方程,公式(9)为色差约束方程,公式(10)、公式(11)、公式(12)和公式(13)为xy坐标约束方程。以上描述的目标方程和约束方程均可由辐通量p表达,从而计算得到辐通量的最优解。得到辐通量的最优解后,计算出颜色可调光源各个通道的的光通量。通过颜色可调光源的光通量,计算出颜色可调光源对应的调光信号数据。比如,LED芯片在稳定的状态下光通量与调光信号数据成正比关系,根据预设的比例系数可由各个通道的光通量计算出各通道的调光信号数据。Among them, the formula (7) is the objective equation, and the formula (8), the formula (9), the formula (10), the formula (11), the formula (12), and the formula (13) are constraint equations. Equation (8) is the hue constraint equation, formula (9) is the hue constraint equation, and formula (10), formula (11), formula (12), and formula (13) are xy coordinate constraint equations. Both the target equation and the constraint equation described above can be expressed by the radiant flux p, thereby calculating the optimal solution of the radiant flux. After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux, the luminous flux of each channel of the color tunable light source is calculated. The dimming signal data corresponding to the color tunable light source is calculated by the luminous flux of the color tunable light source. For example, in a stable state, the luminous flux of the LED chip is proportional to the dimming signal data, and the dimming signal data of each channel can be calculated from the luminous flux of each channel according to a preset proportional coefficient.

步骤S103,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号。Step S103, modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.

对查找到的目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据进行调制,将调光信号数据转换为灯光驱动信号。The dimmed signal data corresponding to the found target light color temperature value and the target color is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal.

步骤S104,通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光。Step S104, controlling the color tunable light source to emit light through the light driving signal.

通过上述获取到的灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。保证了在保证灯光渲染品质的同时实现增强目标物体颜色。 The color-adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained by the above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color-adjustable light source to be emitted. The color temperature of the light is the color temperature value of the target light. It is guaranteed to enhance the color of the target object while ensuring the quality of the lighting rendering.

本发明实施例提供的照明控制方法,通过确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色;在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据;对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值,该照明控制方法达到了了保证灯光渲染品质的同时实现增强目标物体颜色的效果。The illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the invention determines the target light color temperature value and the target color; searches for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color in the preset database; and performs the searched dimming signal data Modulation, obtaining a light driving signal; controlling the color adjustable light source to be illuminated by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color. The color temperature of the light emitted by the light source is the color temperature value of the target light. The lighting control method achieves the effect of enhancing the color of the target object while ensuring the quality of the light rendering.

实施例4Example 4

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制方法,需要说明的是,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图24是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制方法的流程图,如图24所示,该方法包括如下的步骤S101至步骤S105:According to an embodiment of the present invention, a lighting control method is provided. It should be noted that the color tunable light source in this embodiment is equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. Figure 24 is a flowchart of a lighting control method according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 24, the method includes the following steps S101 to S105:

步骤S101,获取目标物体的颜色参数。Step S101: Acquire a color parameter of the target object.

通过获取到的目标物体的图像确定目标物体的参数。The parameters of the target object are determined by the acquired image of the target object.

步骤S102,在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本。Step S102: Search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database.

将获取到的颜色参数输入第一预设数据库,获取第一预设数据库中颜色参数与颜色样本之间的映射关系,通过该映射关系获取到颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本。The obtained color parameter is input into the first preset database, and the mapping relationship between the color parameter and the color sample in the first preset database is obtained, and the target color sample corresponding to the color parameter is obtained through the mapping relationship.

步骤S103,在第二预设数据库中查找与目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据。Step S103, searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database.

将查到的目标颜色样本输入第二预设数据库,获取第二预设数据库中目标颜色样本与调光信号数据之间的映射关系,通过该映射关系获取到目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据。The target color sample is input into the second preset database, and the mapping relationship between the target color sample and the dimming signal data in the second preset database is obtained, and the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample is obtained through the mapping relationship. .

步骤S104,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号。Step S104, modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.

对查找到的目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据进行调制,将调光信号数据转换为灯光驱动信号。通过直接查找调光信号数据,而不需要在线大量计算得到调光信号数据,提升了获取调光信号数据的速度。The dimming signal data corresponding to the found target color sample is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal. By directly searching for the dimming signal data, it is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data in a large amount online, thereby improving the speed of acquiring the dimming signal data.

步骤S105,通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光。Step S105, controlling the color adjustable light source to emit light by the light driving signal.

通过上述获取到的灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强。灯光驱动信号,因此提升了自动识别目标物体的颜色来调节灯光以增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。The color-adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained as described above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object. The light drives the signal, thus improving the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object.

本发明实施例提供的照明控制方法,通过该颜色样本查找得到调光信号数据,通过该调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,该灯光驱动信号驱动颜色可调光源发出灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。而不需要对采集到的目标物体参数通过大量计算得到调光信号数据,从而得到灯光驱动信号驱动颜色可调光源发出灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。因此提升了自动识别目标物体的颜色来调节灯光以增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。The illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the invention obtains the dimming signal data through the color sample search, and obtains a light driving signal by using the dimming signal data, and the light driving signal drives the color adjustable light source to emit a light to illuminate the target object to make the target object The color is enhanced. The dimming signal data is not required to be obtained through a large number of calculations on the acquired target object parameters, thereby obtaining a light driving signal to drive the color adjustable light source to emit light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. Therefore, the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object is improved.

需要说明的是,在附图的流程图示出的步骤可以在诸如一组计算机可执行指令的计算机系统中执行,并且,虽然在流程图中示出了逻辑顺序,但是在某些情况下,可以以不同于此处的顺序执行所示出或描述的步骤。 It should be noted that the steps illustrated in the flowchart of the accompanying drawings may be executed in a computer system such as a set of computer executable instructions, and, although shown in the flowchart, The steps shown or described may be performed in an order different than that herein.

本发明实施例提供了一种照明控制装置,需要说明的是,本发明实施例的照明控制装置可以用于执行本发明实施例所提供的灯光控制方法。以下对本发明实施例提供的照明控制装置进行介绍。The embodiment of the present invention provides a lighting control device. It should be noted that the lighting control device of the embodiment of the present invention can be used to execute the lighting control method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. The lighting control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention will be described below.

图25是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制装置的示意图,如图25所示,该装置包括:获取总模块10,用于获取照明体的调光信号;以及控制总模块20,用于按照调光信号控制照明体发光。25 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 25, the apparatus includes: an acquisition total module 10 for acquiring a dimming signal of an illuminating body; and a control total module 20 for The illumination body is controlled to emit light according to the dimming signal.

通过该实施例的照明控制装置,可以实现增强待测物表面颜色饱和度的技术效果,进而解决了现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的技术问题。Through the illumination control device of the embodiment, the technical effect of enhancing the color saturation of the surface of the object to be tested can be realized, thereby solving the technical problem that the existing light control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

实施例5Example 5

根据本发明实施例,提供了一种照明控制的装置,图26是根据本发明第二实施例的照明控制装置的示意图,如图26所示,该装置包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, a device for lighting control is provided, and FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control device according to a second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 26, the device includes:

接收模块1001,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型;The receiving module 1001 is configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a illuminating body spectral type;

具体的,用户可以通过交互设备输入上述参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型,上述交互设备可以是一个遥控器,结合图,7,用户可以通过使用遥控器对软件界面进行操作。Specifically, the user can input the color temperature of the reference light source, the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum type of the illuminating body through the interaction device. The interaction device may be a remote controller, and the user can use the remote controller to use the software. The interface operates.

查询模块1003,使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;The query module 1003 queries, from the memory, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested by using the reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested;

上述查询模块1003还用于使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供光源;The query module 1003 is further configured to use the reference light source color temperature to query the reference light source of the illumination body and the reference light source color coordinate, and use the illumination body spectral type to query the color channel spectrum of the illumination body from the memory, wherein the illumination body is to be Measuring the object to provide a light source;

具体的,可以采用存储器预先存储光源各通道光谱、参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布光谱,这里需要说明的是,实施例一中的步骤S101中用户输入的参考色温对应上述存储器中的光源光谱、参考光源色坐标,照明体光谱类型对应光源各通道光谱。Specifically, the memory may pre-store the spectrum of each channel of the light source, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested. Here, the reference input by the user in step S101 in the first embodiment is described. The color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the color coordinate of the reference source, and the spectrum type of the illuminator corresponds to the spectrum of each channel of the light source.

计算模块1005,根据参考光源、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;The calculating module 1005 calculates the radiant flux according to the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body;

转换模块1007,用于将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号。The conversion module 1007 is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.

具体的,上述各颜色通道按照上述目标辐通量以白光的形式照射待测物,上述待测物的颜色可以以最大化的改变本身的颜色饱和度而且上述待测物周围待测物颜色色调不失真。Specifically, each of the color channels irradiates the object to be tested in the form of white light according to the target radiation flux, and the color of the object to be tested may be used to maximize the color saturation of the object and the color tone of the object to be tested around the object to be tested. Not distorted.

本申请上述实施例中,上述四个模块相结合,使用事先存储的待测待测物表面反射率分布,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光约束为白光,待测物在上述白光的照射下颜色饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩饱和度而且同时使待测物周围待测物颜色失真的问题。 In the above embodiment of the present application, the above four modules are combined, and the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that The output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light, and the color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, thereby solving the existing light control technology only improving the light color quality of the light itself or simply turning the light The color is changed to the color of the object to be tested, and the problem of the color saturation of the object to be tested and the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested cannot be quantitatively and accurately corrected.

可选的,上述计算模块1005还可以包括:Optionally, the foregoing calculating module 1005 may further include:

第一子计算模块1101,用于通过计算获取待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo);a first sub-calculation module 1101, configured to obtain, by calculation, a color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object under test;

具体的,上述参考光源可以是用户预先存储在存储器中,也可以是用户实时输入到系统中。这里需要说明的是,上述色坐标(xo,yo)可以是CIE1931 xy色坐标,CIE1960uv色坐标,CIE1976 Luv色坐标,CIE1976Lab色坐标等。这里采用CIE1931 xy色坐标。Specifically, the reference light source may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time. It should be noted that the above color coordinates (x o , y o ) may be CIE1931 xy color coordinates, CIE1960uv color coordinates, CIE1976 Luv color coordinates, CIE1976Lab color coordinates, and the like. Here CIE1931 xy color coordinates are used.

第二子计算模块1103,用于通过计算获取待测物在可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000103
a second sub-calculation module 1103, configured to obtain color coordinates of a maximum saturation that can be achieved under the condensable light source by calculation
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000103

模型建立模块1105,用于根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)、待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000104
光源各通道光谱和用户输入的目标饱和度水平建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型。The model establishing module 1105 is configured to: according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test under the reference light source, and the maximum saturation color coordinate that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000104
The spectrum of each channel of the light source and the target saturation level of the user input establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.

第三子计算模块1107,用于根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。The third sub-calculation module 1107 is configured to calculate a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.

具体的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以通过现有的成熟算法得到,上述目标辐通量即全局最优解。Specifically, the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.

可选的,第一子计算模块1101还可以包括:Optionally, the first sub-calculation module 1101 may further include:

第四子计算模块1201,用于通过如下公式计算得到(xo,yo):The fourth sub-calculation module 1201 is configured to calculate (x o , y o ) by the following formula:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000105
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000105

其中,p是表示光源各通道辐通量的向量,向量axo表示

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000106
向量ayo表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000107
向量azo表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000108
r(λ)是待测物表面的反射率分布光谱,s(λ)参考光源,光源有n个颜色通道,则p,axo,ayo,azo都是n×1的向量。Where p is a vector representing the radiant flux of each channel of the light source, and the vector a xo represents
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000106
Vector a yo
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000107
Vector a zo representation
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000108
r(λ) is the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, s(λ) is the reference light source, and the light source has n color channels, then p, a xo , a yo , a zo are all n × 1 vectors.

具体的,待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。照明体提供的各光源的不同颜色通道的光谱可以由用户事先测得然后输入设备,不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择,参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。Specifically, the reflectance spectrum of the test object may be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the test object previously stored in the memory may be used. The spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light sources uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant with different color temperatures, the color temperature is selected by the user, and the spectrum of the reference light source can also be User input manually.

可选的,上述第二子计算模块1103还可以包括:Optionally, the foregoing second sub-computing module 1103 may further include:

获取模块,用于从存储器中获取参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr);Obtaining a module, configured to obtain color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source from the memory;

第五子计算模块,用于根据待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo),参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr)、参考光源光谱、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和光源各通道光谱计算出

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000109
The fifth sub-calculation module is configured to: according to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under test, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference light source, the reference light source spectrum, and the reflection of the surface of the object to be tested Rate distribution spectrum and spectrum of each channel of the light source are calculated
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000109

具体的,结合图3所示,图3为由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围即表示 此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。上述三角形可以为一个色域,上述色域可以由照明灯提供的光源各通道光谱和待测物表面的反射光谱计算得出,(xo,yo)为待测物在参考光源下的色坐标,(xr,yr)为参考光源的色坐标,由色度学可知,在待测物在参考光源下的色坐标(xo,yo)和参考光源的色坐标(xr,yr)的连线上所有的颜色色相一致,颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。从图3中可见待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000110
是(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,所以可以根据由(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述色域构建函数计算上述待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000111
这里
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000112
的饱和度增加的水平被认为是100%。Specifically, in combination with FIG. 3, FIG. 3 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B. The above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) is the color of the object under test under the reference light source. The coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source. From the colorimetric, the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source and the color coordinates of the reference source (x r , The color of all the colors on the line of y r ) is the same. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 3, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source can be seen.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000110
Is the intersection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, so it can be based on the connection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) The color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000111
Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000112
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.

可选的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以建立为:建立至少四个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中,所述约束条件包括:Optionally, the calculation model of the target radiant flux may be established as: establishing at least four constraints to define a range of values of the radiant flux vector p. Wherein the constraints include:

约束条件一:所有颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total flux of all color channels is greater than zero.

约束条件二:各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的色坐标点在(xr,yr)与(xo,yo)的连线上。Constraint 3: The color coordinate point of the object to be tested is on the line connecting (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ).

约束条件四:灯光的色坐标点在设定的白光区域范围内。Constraint 4: The color coordinate point of the light is within the set white light area.

用d来表示待测物的色坐标与

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000113
的距离。目标方程是最小化d与总光通量的加权和,其中后者作为可选,即可以加在目标方程里也可以不加。Use d to indicate the color coordinates of the object to be tested
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000113
the distance. The objective equation is to minimize the weighted sum of d and total luminous flux, with the latter being optional, either added to the target equation or not.

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过解数学优化问题决定唯一一个令目标方程的值最小的最优解。该过程由建立求解一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, and the only optimal solution that minimizes the value of the objective equation is determined by solving the mathematical optimization problem. This process is implemented by solving a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,目标方程的第二项可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的线性或非线性方程。比如所有颜色通道的总光通量,光效,CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the second term of the objective equation can be any linear or nonlinear equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, the total luminous flux, light efficiency, CRI, etc. of all color channels. The process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

其中,各通道的光通量等于该通道的辐通量乘以该通道1w的辐通量转换的光通量Wherein, the luminous flux of each channel is equal to the luminous flux of the channel multiplied by the luminous flux converted by the radiation flux of the channel 1w

所述待测物的色坐标可由待测物反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,照明体各通道相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。具体的,下面结合图3至图5详细描述上述计算模型的推导过程:The color coordinates of the object to be tested may be represented by a reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, a CIE human eye tristimulus value function, a relative spectral distribution of each channel of the illumination body, and a radiation flux vector p. Specifically, the derivation process of the above calculation model is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 5:

实际上当光源有n个颜色通道,在此光源照射下的待测物的颜色可以看作是待测物在光源中每个单色颜色通道的照射下达到的各颜色的混合。因此CIE1931xy色度图上,在只有一个光源的情况下,所能达到的待测物颜色点只能在待测物分别被n个颜色通道照射下的颜色点组成的色域内。同时,当被照待测物反射率和光源光谱确定,此待测物在此光源下的颜色范围也是确定的。比如光源由红绿蓝三种颜色LED组成,R,G,B分别表示被照待测物在红光LED,绿光LED,蓝光LED照射下的颜色值。图3显示由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围。即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。设待测物在参考灯光下颜色的CIE1931xy色坐标为(xo,yo)。由色度学我们可知,在参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的连线上所有的颜色点色相一致。颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000114
表示在此光源下待测物所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点。不 难看出点
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000115
应是(xr,yr)和(xo,yo)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,如图3所示。In fact, when the light source has n color channels, the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined. For example, the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Figure 3 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B. Let the CIE1931xy color coordinate of the color of the object under reference light be (x o , y o ). From colorimetry, we can see that all the color points of the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. point
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000114
Indicates the color point at which the object under test can reach maximum saturation. It’s not hard to see
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000115
It should be the intersection of the line of (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, as shown in Fig. 3.

连接参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的直线方程可以表示为:The equation of the line connecting the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) can be expressed as:

y=kx+b  (1)。y=kx+b (1).

设我们要优化的颜色点是(x′o,y′o),由于颜色色相要保持不变,因此(x′o,y′o)需要满足式(1)。(x′o,y′o)的表达式为:Let the color point we want to optimize is (x' o , y' o ). Since the color hue should remain unchanged, (x' o , y' o ) needs to satisfy the formula (1). The expression for (x' o , y' o ) is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000116
其中,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000116
among them,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000117
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000117

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000118
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000118

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000119
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000119

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000120
是灯具各通道的相对光谱能量分布。照明体提供的各光源的不同颜色通道的光谱可以由用户事先测得然后输入设备。
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000120
It is the relative spectral energy distribution of each channel of the luminaire. The spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured in advance by the user and then input to the device.

为了增加待测物颜色的饱和度,我们可以通过最小化(x′o,y′o)和

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000121
之间的距离来实现。(x′o,y′o)和
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000122
之间的距离表示为:
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000123
In order to increase the saturation of the color of the object to be tested, we can minimize (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000121
The distance between them is achieved. (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000122
The distance between them is expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000123

在大部分场合中灯光色彩被限定为白光。ANSI C78.377标准为8个色温点规定了8个四边形。我们把灯光色彩限定在这些四边形围成的白光区域内,在这里我们对白光区域作分段线性拟合,上述白光区域分段函数的曲线如图4所示。在CIE1931 xy坐标系里,整个白光区域被分成两块,x坐标的取值范围是[xmin,xmid]和[xmid,xmax]。其中白光区域上限的分段线性拟合函数为:In most cases the color of the light is limited to white light. The ANSI C78.377 standard specifies eight quadrilaterals for eight color temperature points. We limit the color of the light to the white light area enclosed by these quadrilaterals. Here we make a piecewise linear fit to the white light area. The curve of the white light area piecewise function is shown in Fig. 4. In the CIE1931 xy coordinate system, the entire white light region is divided into two blocks, and the x-coordinates range from [x min , x mid ] and [x mid , x max ]. The piecewise linear fitting function of the upper limit of the white light region is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000124
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000124

白光区域下限的分段线性拟合函数为:The piecewise linear fit function for the lower bound of the white light region is:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000125
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000125

灯光颜色的xy坐标可以由下式计算:The xy coordinate of the light color can be calculated by:

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000126
其中,
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000126
among them,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000127
ay表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000128
az表示
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000129
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000127
a y indicates
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000128
a z indicates
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000129

同时,每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式。At the same time, the luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship.

Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n,其中pi是向量p的第i个分量,Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,由下式积分得出。Φ ivi ·p i ,i=1,...,n, where p i is the i-th component of the vector p, and Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W, which is integrated by the following formula Out.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000130
i=1,…,n,其中,km是个常数,为673。
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000131
是第i个颜色通道的相对光谱分布,v(λ)是人眼明视觉光谱光效分布。因此总光通是
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000132
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000130
i=1,...,n, where k m is a constant and is 673.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000131
Is the relative spectral distribution of the i-th color channel, and v(λ) is the light-effect distribution of the human visual spectrum. So the total light is
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000132

除了最小化(x′o,y′o)和

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000133
之间的距离,最大化总光通量可以作为另一个目标。因此目标方程是两个目标表达式的加权和,优化问题模型表示如下。In addition to minimizing (x' o , y' o ) and
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000133
The distance between the maximal total luminous flux can be another target. Therefore the objective equation is the weighted sum of the two target expressions, and the optimization problem model is expressed as follows.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000134
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000134

s.t.  [1,…,1]p>0,S.t. [1,...,1]p>0,

Φvi·pi≤Φi,max,i=1,2,…,n,Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max ,i=1,2,...,n,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000135
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000135

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000136
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000136

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000137
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000137

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000138
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000138

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000139
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000139

s.t.  [1,…,1]p>0,S.t. [1,...,1]p>0,

Φvi·pi≤Φi,max,i=1,2,…,n,Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max ,i=1,2,...,n,

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000140
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000140

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000141
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000141

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000142
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000142

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000143
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000143

色坐标色坐标其中λ表示权重,Φi,max表示第i个颜色通道最大的光通量。约束条件中[1,…,1]p>0限定光源的总辐通量必须大于0,Φvi·pi≤Φi,max限定各颜色通道的光通量不能大于该颜色通道的最大光通量。

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000144
表示新产生的物体颜色仍然需要满足式(1)。后面的三个不等式限定灯光的色坐标在线性拟合的白光区域内。分别解以上两个式子,比较f1和f2的值,两个目标方程的较小值对应的最优解即是最优辐射通量。Color coordinate color coordinates where λ represents the weight, and Φ i,max represents the maximum luminous flux of the ith color channel. In the constraint [1,...,1]p>0, the total radiant flux of the light source must be greater than 0, Φ vi ·p i ≤Φ i,max defines that the luminous flux of each color channel cannot be greater than the maximum luminous flux of the color channel.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000144
It means that the color of the newly generated object still needs to satisfy the formula (1). The latter three inequalities define the color coordinates of the light within a linearly fitted white light region. Solve the above two equations and compare the values of f 1 and f 2 . The optimal solution corresponding to the smaller values of the two objective equations is the optimal radiant flux.

得到各颜色通道的辐通量最优解后,各个通道的光通量Φi可由Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n计算得出。由发光体的特性可由Φi计算每个颜色通道的调光信号。比如LED芯片在稳定的状态下电流值与光通量成正比关系,由事先标定的比例系数可由Φi计算出第i个通道的电流值。After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux of each color channel, the luminous flux Φ i of each channel can be calculated by Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n. The dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from Φ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the current value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the Φ i by the scale factor previously calibrated.

以上介绍的方法流程如图5所示。The method flow described above is shown in Figure 5.

通过本发明实施例的分析,可以获知本申请欲保护的核心创新点包括:Through the analysis of the embodiments of the present invention, it can be known that the core innovation points to be protected by the present application include:

一种通过优化光源输出光的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱分布和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据某一设定参考灯光颜色,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强。同时系统输出光是白光,同时,根据所选 参考灯光色温全自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。在光源光谱合适的情况下,可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色饱和度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。系统输出光是白光,不会使被照物周围待测物颜色失真。A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source. The system and method obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested. The color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced. At the same time, the system output light is white light, and at the same time, according to the selected The reference light color temperature fully adjusts the spectrum of the illumination source, and the operation is simple. In the case where the spectrum of the light source is suitable, the effect of the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested can be accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light. The output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.

下面就本申请的实施方案在具体应用场景下的应用进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application of the implementation of the present application in a specific application scenario:

一个典型实施例的系统如图6所示。用户事先测照明灯具中每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。待测物表面的反射率数据可以是出厂预设的标准反射率数据或者用户实时测得的反射率,也存在存储器中。同时,参考光源分布也存在存储器当中。在使用时,用户指定使用哪种待测物反射率数据,灯具光谱类型和参考光源色温,由用户界面将信息传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据,参考光源和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器实现如下算法,计算出调光信号传给光源的各颜色通道。A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG. The user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory. The reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory. At the same time, the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory. In use, the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source. The controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.

照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备。不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。图7为用户输入上述参考光源的软件界面。一旦用户选定参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如表格1所示,表格1为待测物在不同色温的光源下的色坐标。The spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device. The spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.

表格1:待测物在不同色温的光源下的色坐标Table 1: Color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000145
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000145

以皮包为例,带白光约束的增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图8所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图9和图10所示。 1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 8. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图11所示。其中色域由三角形围出,白光区域为三角形内的四边形表示。R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, and the white light region is represented by a quadrangle within a triangle. R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3127, 0.3290), O represents the color coordinate point of the bag under the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O * represents the bag under the lighting fixture. The color point that reaches the maximum saturation, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.建立优化问题。这里k=0.2567,b=0.2487,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。3. Establish optimization issues. Here k = 0.2067, b = 0.2487, the luminous flux converted to the 1W radiant flux of the four channels is [311, 174, 482, 46.4] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] ( Corresponding to WRGB).

4.解优化问题得最优解辐通量向量为[1.6665,0,0.2643,0.3794](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(88%,0%,98%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。优化得到的待测物颜色点的色坐标是(0.3668,0.3429),在图11中用O‘表示,优化得到的灯光颜色点的色坐标是(0.3351,0.3345),在图11中用L表示。可以看到灯光颜色点在白光区域的边界上。4. The optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.

根据以上流程可以得到被照物体在不同参考光源下优化得到的PWM值,表格2以6500K参考光源为例,给出表1中四个物体对应的颜色增强之后的颜色色坐标,灯光色坐标,灯具PWM驱动信号。According to the above process, the PWM value obtained by the illuminated object under different reference light sources can be obtained. Table 2 takes the reference light source of 6500K as an example, and gives the color color coordinates and the light color coordinates of the four objects corresponding to the objects in Table 1. Lamp PWM drive signal.

表格2:对应不同物体在6500K参考光源下的优化结果Table 2: Optimization results for different objects under 6500K reference source

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000146
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000146

实施例6Example 6

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制的装置,图27是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制装置的示意图,如图27所示,该装置包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a device for lighting control, and FIG. 27 is a schematic view of a lighting control device according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG.

接收模块901,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d;The receiving module 901 is configured to receive an identifier of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user;

具体的,上述身份识别标志可以置于待测物的表面,可以是条形码或二维码,每个身份识别标志对应一个待测物,上述目标饱和度d可以是待测物表面颜色的饱和度,可以是用户期望通过照明体的照射,待测物表面的颜色所达到的颜色饱和度。可以采 用实施例三中的传感器通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,身份识别标志关联待测物。Specifically, the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested. Can be taken The identification flag is transmitted to the controller by sensing using the sensor in the third embodiment, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.

查询模块903,用于使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;还用于使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和光源各颜色通道光谱,其中,照明体为待测物提供光源;The query module 903 is configured to use the identification mark to query the reflectivity distribution of the surface of the object to be tested from the memory; and is also used for querying the reference light source spectrum of the illumination body, the reference light source spectral color coordinate, and the light source by using the reference light source color temperature to query from the memory. Each color channel spectrum, wherein the illuminating body provides a light source for the object to be tested;

具体的,可以采用实施例三中的存储器预先存储光源各颜色通道光谱、参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布,这里需要说明的是,步骤S101中用户输入的参考色温对应上述存储器中的光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和光源各颜色通道光谱。Specifically, the memory in the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested. The reference input by the user in step S101 is described. The color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source.

计算模块905,根据目标饱和度d、相应的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量。The calculation module 905 calculates the radiant flux according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, to obtain the target radiant corresponding to the illuminating body. the amount.

转换模块907,用于将目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。The conversion module 907 is configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body.

具体的,上述照明体的各个颜色通道可以按照上述辐通量照射待测物,上述待测物的颜色可以满足上述目标饱和度d。Specifically, each color channel of the illuminating body can illuminate the object to be tested according to the radiant flux, and the color of the object to be tested can satisfy the target saturation d.

本申请上述实施例中,上述四个模块相结合使用事先存储的被照待测物表面反射率,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光的照射下,待测物在参考灯光下的颜色的饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩的问题。In the above embodiment of the present application, the above four modules are combined to use the previously stored surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body so that the illuminating body Under the illumination of the output light, the saturation of the color of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light. As the color of the object to be tested, it is impossible to quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

可选的,上述计算模块905还可以包括:Optionally, the foregoing calculating module 905 may further include:

第一子计算模块9051,用于通过计算获取目标色坐标,其中,目标色坐标是待测物达到目标饱和度d时所呈现的色坐标;a first sub-calculation module 9051, configured to acquire a target color coordinate by calculation, wherein the target color coordinate is a color coordinate presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d;

模型建立模块9052,用于根据目标色坐标建立照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;a model establishing module 9052, configured to establish a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body according to the target color coordinate;

第二子计算模块9053,用于根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出目标辐通量。The second sub-calculation module 9053 is configured to calculate a target radiant flux according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body.

具体的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以通过现有的成熟算法得到,上述目标辐通量即全局最优解。Specifically, the calculation model of the target radiation flux can be obtained by an existing mature algorithm, and the target radiation flux is a global optimal solution.

具体的,上述第一子计算模块9051还可以包括:Specifically, the foregoing first sub-computing module 9051 may further include:

第三子计算模块1001,用于计算出待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)。The third sub-calculation module 1001 is configured to calculate a color coordinate (x o , y o ) of the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum.

具体的,上述参考光源光谱可以是用户预先存储在存储器中,也可以是用户实时输入到系统中。Specifically, the reference light source spectrum may be pre-stored in the memory by the user, or may be input into the system by the user in real time.

第四子计算模块1003,用于计算出待测物在光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000147
The fourth sub-computing module 1003 is configured to calculate the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000147

第五子计算模块1005,根据待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标和最大饱和度的色 坐标以及目标饱和度d计算出目标色坐标(x’o,y’o)。A fifth sub-module 1005 is calculated, was calculated from the measured color coordinates and the target color coordinate and saturation d the maximum saturation of the light spectrum of the target reference color coordinates (x 'o, y' o ).

可选的,上述第三子计算模块1001可以用于通过如下公式计算得到(xo,yo):Optionally, the third sub-calculation module 1001 described above may be used to calculate (x o , y o ) by the following formula:

根据现有色度学公式,对于在一个照明体下的待测物,它表面颜色的三刺激值CIE XYZ可由待测物表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,标准光源光谱分布计算得到。根据现有色度学公式,可将CIE XYZ值转换成CIE1931 xy色坐标(xo,yo),具体的,待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。照明体提供的各光源的不同颜色通道的光谱可以由用户事先测得然后输入设备,不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择,参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。According to the existing colorimetric formula, for a test object under a illuminating body, the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be calculated from the surface reflection spectrum of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the standard light source spectral distribution. According to the existing colorimetric formula, the CIE XYZ value can be converted into CIE1931 xy color coordinate (x o , y o ). Specifically, the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested can be actually measured by the user and then input to the device, or pre-existing. A standard reflectance spectrum of such a test object in the memory. The spectrum of the different color channels of each light source provided by the illuminating body can be measured by the user before inputting the device, and the spectrum of the different color temperature reference light sources uses the spectrum of the standard illuminant with different color temperatures, the color temperature is selected by the user, and the spectrum of the reference light source can also be User input manually.

可选的,上述第四子计算模块1003计算出待测物在光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000148
的步骤可以包括:Optionally, the fourth sub-computing module 1003 calculates a color coordinate of a maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the light source.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000148
The steps can include:

从存储器中获取参考光源光谱色坐标(xr,yr);Obtaining the reference source spectral color coordinates (x r , y r ) from the memory;

根据待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)、参考光源光谱的色坐标(xr,yr)、参考光源光谱、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱计算出待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000149
According to the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates (x r , y r ) of the reference source spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the color of each source The channel spectrum calculates the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference source.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000149

具体的,结合图13所示,图13为由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。上述三角形可以为一个色域,上述色域可以由照明灯提供的光源各颜色通道光谱和待测物表面的反射光谱计算得出,(xo,yo)为待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标,(xr,yr)为参考光源光谱的色坐标,由色度学可知,在待测物在参考光源光谱下的色坐标(xo,yo)和参考光源光谱的色坐标(xr,yr)的连线上所有的颜色色相一致,颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。从图13中可见待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000150
是(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,所以可以根据由(xo,yo)和(xr,yr)的连线和上述色域构建函数计算上述待测物在参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000151
这里
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000152
的饱和度增加的水平被认为是100%。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 , FIG. 13 is a color range of the object to be tested surrounded by three points of R, G, and B, that is, a coordinate point indicating a color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by the light source. It falls within the triangle enclosed by the three points of R, G, and B. The above triangle may be a color gamut, and the color gamut may be calculated by the spectrum of each color channel of the light source provided by the illumination lamp and the reflection spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, (x o , y o ) for the object to be tested under the reference source spectrum The color coordinates, (x r , y r ) are the color coordinates of the reference source spectrum. From the colorimetric, the color coordinates (x o , y o ) of the object under the reference source spectrum and the color of the reference source spectrum are known. All the colors of the lines on the coordinates (x r , y r ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. From Figure 13, the color coordinates of the maximum saturation that the object under test can reach under the reference light source can be seen.
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000150
Is the intersection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, so it can be based on the connection of (x o , y o ) and (x r , y r ) The color gamut constructing function calculates the color coordinate of the maximum saturation that the object to be tested can reach under the reference light source
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000151
Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000152
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%.

可选的,上述第一子计算模块9051可以通过如下公式计算得到目标色坐标(x’o,y’o),Optionally, the first sub-calculation module 9051 can calculate the target color coordinate (x′ o , y′ o ) by using the following formula.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000153
其中,d是目标饱和度。
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000153
Where d is the target saturation.

具体的,d为可以用户期望增加的饱和度水平,可以用百分数表示。Specifically, d is a saturation level that can be expected by the user and can be expressed as a percentage.

可选的,上述目标辐通量的计算模型可以建立为:Optionally, the calculation model of the above target radiant flux can be established as:

建立至少三个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中所述约束条件包括:Establishing at least three constraints defines the range of values of the radiant flux vector p. The constraints include:

约束条件一:照明体各颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。 Constraint 1: The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.

约束条件二:照明体各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的在照明体提供的可调色光源下的色坐标(x,y)向量能够与(x′o,y′o)进行匹配。Constraint 3: The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object to be tested under the tonable light source provided by the illuminant can be matched with (x' o , y' o ).

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过建立最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量的目标在限定的取值范围内寻找最优解。该过程由建立一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.

注意,这里目标可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的目标方程。比如最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量,最大化光效,最大化CRI等。Note that the target here can be any target equation related to the radiant flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc.

这里还需注意的是,在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should also be noted that the process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all effective solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution. Wait.

每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式:Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n其中Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,pi是向量p的第i个分量。The luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship: Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n where Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W, p i is the ith component of the vector p.

因此最大化

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000154
即可得目标方程。Maximize
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000154
The target equation can be obtained.

令Φvi·pi小于等于第i个通道的最大光通量,即可得到第二个约束条件。Let Φ vi ·p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.

同时,由现有的色度学公式,在一个照明体下的待测物表面颜色的CIE XYZ三刺激值可由待测物表面反射函数,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,该照明体各通道的相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。At the same time, from the existing colorimetric formula, the CIE XYZ tristimulus value of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be obtained by the surface reflection function of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the channel of the illuminator The relative spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are expressed.

由现有的色度学公式,XYZ表达式可转换成待测物表面颜色的CIE1931xy表达式,令该xy色坐标表达式等于目标色坐标向量(x’o,y’o),即可得到第三个约束条件。From the existing colorimetric formula, the XYZ expression can be converted into a CIE1931xy expression of the surface color of the object to be tested, so that the xy color coordinate expression is equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and The third constraint.

下面就本申请在具体应用场景下进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application in a specific application scenario:

这个发明专利包括以下方法和步骤:This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:

本系统包括一个颜色可调光源,传感器,存储器和控制器。光源中包含二种或二种以上颜色的发光体,比如发光二级管(LED)。光源中的每组同色发光体用同一个电流或电压信号控制。在这里称光源中一个或多个相同颜色的发光体为一个颜色通道。The system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller. The light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.

事先测得待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源中每个颜色通道的光谱分布。待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。目标待测物表面有身份识别标志,比如条形码,传感器通过感应身份识别标志将信号传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器接收用户传来的参考灯光色温值和期望增加的饱和度水平,然后在存储器中调出相应的参考灯光光谱,实现如下算法,最后计算出调光信号传给光源 的各颜色通道。系统框图如图14所示。The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance. The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory. The surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory. The controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the dimming signal to the light source. Each color channel. The system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.

根据现有色度学公式,对于在一个照明体下的待测物,它表面颜色的三刺激值CIE XYZ可由待测物表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,各通路相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, for a test object under a illuminating body, the tristimulus value CIE XYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the spokes. The flux vector p is represented.

根据现有色度学公式,可将CIE XYZ的表达式转换成CIE1931 xy色坐标的表达式。实际上当光源有n个颜色通道,在此光源照射下的待测物的颜色可以看作是待测物在光源中每个单色颜色通道的照射下达到的各颜色的混合。因此CIE1931xy色度图上,在只有一个光源的情况下,所能达到的待测物颜色点只能在待测物分别被n个颜色通道照射下的颜色点组成的色域内。同时,当被照待测物反射率和光源光谱确定,此待测物在此光源下的颜色范围也是确定的。比如光源由红绿蓝三种颜色LED组成,R,G,B分别表示被照待测物在白光LED,红光LED,绿光LED,蓝光LED照射下的颜色值。图13显示由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围。即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。设待测物在参考灯光下颜色的CIE1931xy色坐标为(xo,yo),将参考灯光光谱能量分布和待测物反射率分布代入式(1-5)则可得到(xo,yo)。由色度学我们可知,在参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的连线上所有的颜色点色相一致。颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000155
表示在此光源下待测物所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点。不难看出点
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000156
应是(xr,yr)和(xo,yo)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,如图13所示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates. In fact, when the light source has n color channels, the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined. For example, the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B. Let the CIE1931xy color coordinate of the object under the reference light be (x o , y o ), and substitute the reference light spectral energy distribution and the reflectance distribution of the test object into the formula (1-5) to obtain (x o , y o ). From colorimetry, we can see that all the color points of the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. point
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000155
Indicates the color point at which the object under test can reach maximum saturation. It’s not hard to see
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000156
It should be the intersection of the line of (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, as shown in FIG.

这里点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000157
的饱和度增加的水平被认为为100%。设d为期望增加的饱和度水平,用百分数表示。设期望达到的颜色色坐标为(x’o,y’o),则(x’o,y’o)可以用下式计算。Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000157
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%. Let d be the desired increase in saturation level, expressed as a percentage. Let the color coordinate coordinates expected to be (x' o , y' o ), then (x' o , y' o ) can be calculated by the following formula.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000158
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000158
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000159
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000159

建立三个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中所述约束条件包括:Three constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p. The constraints include:

约束条件一:照明体各颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.

约束条件二:照明体各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的在照明体提供的光源下的色坐标(x,y)向量能够与(x′o,y′o)进行匹配。Constraint 3: The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过建立最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量的目标在限定的取值范围内寻找最优解。该过程由建立一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,这里目标可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的目标方程。比如最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量,最大化光效,最大化CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现, 比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc. The process of determining the optimal solution within a defined range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods. For example, traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式:Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n其中Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,pi是向量p的第i个分量。The luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship: Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n where Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W, p i is the ith component of the vector p.

因此最大化

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000160
即可得目标方程。Maximize
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000160
The target equation can be obtained.

令Φvi·pi小于等于第i个通道的最大光通量,即可得到第二个约束条件。Let Φ vi ·p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.

同时,由现有的色度学公式,在一个照明体下的待测物表面颜色的xy色坐标向量可由待测物表面反射函数,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,该照明体各通道的相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。令该xy色坐标表达式等于目标色坐标向量(x’o,y’o),即可得到第三个约束条件。得到各颜色通道的辐通量最优解后,各个通道的光通量Φi可由Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n计算得出。由发光体的特性可由Φi计算每个颜色通道的调光信号。比如LED芯片在稳定的状态下电流值与光通量成正比关系,由事先标定的比例系数可由Φi计算出第i个通道的调光信号值。以上介绍的方法流程图见图15。具体为:At the same time, from the existing colorimetric formula, the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body The spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented. Let the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained. After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux of each color channel, the luminous flux Φ i of each channel can be calculated by Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n. The dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from Φ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the Φ i by the scale factor previously calibrated. The flow chart of the method described above is shown in Figure 15. Specifically:

步骤10,接收用户传来的参考光源色温和期望增加的饱和度水平。Step 10: Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.

步骤20,调出待测物反射率光谱,光源各颜色通道光谱和参考光源光谱。In step 20, the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.

步骤30,计算待测物在参考灯光下的最大饱和度颜色点的坐标值。Step 30: Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.

步骤40,根据期望增加的饱和度水平计算出目标颜色点的坐标值。In step 40, the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.

步骤50,建立求解优化问题14,求得各通道辐通量。In step 50, a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.

步骤60,将各通道辐通量转化成各通道的调光信号。In step 60, the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.

本发明欲保护的核心创新点包括:The core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:

一种通过调节照明光源的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱,参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据用户期望的饱和度增加水平,建立线性优化问题,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强的同时颜色色相不发生改变A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source. The system and method obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone. The light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.

本发明具有以下优点:The invention has the following advantages:

根据所选参考灯光色温和期望饱和度增加水平自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色鲜艳度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。 The spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple. The effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.

下面以皮包在照明灯下为例进行详细阐述:The following is a detailed description of the bag under the lighting:

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备。不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。如图16所示,图16可以为用户选择照明体色温参考光源光谱的软件界面示意图。The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory. The spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device. The spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. As shown in FIG. 16, FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.

一旦用户选定参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如下表格3所示,表格3是皮包在不同参考光源下达到的色坐标。Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.

表格3:待测物在不同色温的光源下的真实颜色Table 3: True color of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000161
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000161

新的目标颜色是在待测物的真实颜色的基础上由饱和度增加水平d得到,这里d的数值范围由0%-100%,由用户决定。The new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0% to 100%, which is determined by the user.

以皮包为例,增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图17所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图18和图19所示。1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图20所示。其中色域由三角形围出,R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference light source, the coordinate is (0.3127, 0.3290), and O represents the color coordinate point of the leather bag under the D65 reference light source, and the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O* represents The color point of the bag that can reach the maximum saturation under this lighting fixture, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.设用户界面传来的饱和度水平为20%,目标颜色点等于[0.3455,0.3374]+([0.5783,0.3972]-[0.3455,0.3374])*0.2=[0.3920,0.3494]。3. Set the saturation level from the user interface to 20%, and the target color point to be equal to [0.3455, 0.3374] + ([0.5783, 0.3972] - [0.3455, 0.3374]) * 0.2 = [0.3920, 0.3494].

4.根据目标颜色点的色坐标计算k1,k2,k3,建立优化问题(14)。这里,4. Calculate k 1 , k 2 , k 3 according to the color coordinates of the target color point, and establish an optimization problem (14). Here,

k1=[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757]Tk 1 =[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,

k2=[0.2602,-0.27000,-1.6757,-2.5521]Tk 2 = [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,

k3=[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643]T,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。k 3 =[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T , the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).

5.解优化问题(14)得最优解辐通量向量为[0.6621,0.0578,0.1062,0.1311](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(99%,40%,100%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。5. Solution optimization problem (14) The optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).

据以上流程可以得到待测物在不同参考光源下不同饱和度水平对应的PWM值,这里以6500K参考光源为例,给出表3中四个待测物在四个不同饱和度水平下对应的PWM值According to the above process, the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained. Here, taking the 6500K reference light source as an example, the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value

表格4:对应不同待测物在6500K参考光源下不同饱和度水平的PWM调光信号Table 4: PWM dimming signals at different saturation levels for different DUTs under 6500K reference source

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000162
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000162

实施例7Example 7

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制的装置,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图28是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制装置的示意图,如图28所示,该装置包括:确定单元10,查找单元20,获取单元30和控制单元40。According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a device for lighting control, the color tunable light source in this embodiment being equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. 28 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 28, the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40.

确定单元10,用于确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色。The determining unit 10 is configured to determine a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to a color that the target object needs to be enhanced.

查找单元20,用于在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据。The searching unit 20 is configured to search, in the preset database, the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.

获取单元30,用于由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号。The obtaining unit 30 is configured to obtain a light driving signal from the dimmed signal data obtained by the searching.

控制单元40,用于根据灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。 The control unit 40 is configured to control the color adjustable light source to emit light according to the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source. The color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light.

本发明实施例提供的灯光控制装置,通过确定单元10,确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色,查找单元20在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据,获取单元30由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号。控制单元40根据灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。在该装置中,由于控制单元控制颜色可调光源发光,颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值,保证了灯光渲染品质的同时实现增强目标物体颜色。The light control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention determines the target light color temperature value and the target color by the determining unit 10, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the searching unit The data of the dimming signal corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color is searched in the preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, and the obtaining unit 30 searches by The obtained dimming signal data is obtained as a light driving signal. The control unit 40 controls the color adjustable light source to emit light according to the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to enhance the target color of the target object, and control the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color adjustable light source. The color temperature value of the target light. In the device, since the control unit controls the color-adjustable light source to emit light, the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source enhances the target color of the target object, and controls the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to be the color temperature value of the target light. It enhances the quality of the light rendering while enhancing the color of the target object.

图29是根据本发明第四实施例的一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图,如图29所示,该装置包括:确定单元10,查找单元20,获取单元30和控制单元40。其中,查找单元20还包括:确定模块201、计算模块202、获取模块203和创建模块204。29 is a schematic diagram of an optional lighting control apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 29, the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40. The searching unit 20 further includes: a determining module 201, a calculating module 202, an obtaining module 203, and a creating module 204.

确定单元10,查找单元20,获取单元30和控制单元40的作用与上述实施例中作用相同,在此不再赘述。The functions of the determining unit 10, the searching unit 20, the obtaining unit 30 and the control unit 40 are the same as those in the above embodiment, and are not described herein again.

确定模块201,用于确定优化方程,其中,优化方程由标准光源的光谱、目标灯光色温值、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、颜色可调光源的相对光谱和辐通量创建的方程,其中,标准光源的光谱是在目标灯光色温下获取的标准光源的光谱,辐通量是表示颜色可调光源辐射强弱的物理量。The determining module 201 is configured to determine an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is composed of a spectrum of a standard light source, a target light color temperature value, a human eye tristimulus value function, a standard diffuse reflectance data, a color tunable light source relative spectrum, and a spoke. The equation created by flux, wherein the spectrum of the standard source is the spectrum of the standard source obtained at the target color temperature, and the flux is the physical quantity representing the intensity of the tunable source.

计算模块202,用于对优化方程执行计算处理,得到辐通量的最优解。The calculation module 202 is configured to perform a calculation process on the optimization equation to obtain an optimal solution of the radiant flux.

获取模块203,用于根据辐通量的最优解,得到对应的调光信号数据。The obtaining module 203 is configured to obtain corresponding dimming signal data according to an optimal solution of the radiant flux.

创建模块204,用于创建预设数据库,其中,数据库用于存储调光信号数据。The creating module 204 is configured to create a preset database, wherein the database is used to store dimming signal data.

图30是根据本发明第四实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图,如图30所示,该装置包括:确定单元10,查找单元20,获取单元30和控制单元40。其中,查找单元20还包括:确定模块201、计算模块202、获取模块203和创建模块204。获取模块203还包括:获取子模块2031、第一计算子模块2032和第二计算子模块2033。30 is a schematic diagram of another alternative lighting control apparatus according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 30, the apparatus includes a determining unit 10, a searching unit 20, an obtaining unit 30, and a control unit 40. The searching unit 20 further includes: a determining module 201, a calculating module 202, an obtaining module 203, and a creating module 204. The obtaining module 203 further includes: an obtaining submodule 2031, a first calculating submodule 2032, and a second calculating submodule 2033.

确定单元10,查找单元20,获取单元30、控制单元40、确定模块201、计算模块202、获取模块203和创建模块204的作用与上述实施例中作用相同,在此不再赘述。The functions of the determining unit 10, the searching unit 20, the obtaining unit 30, the controlling unit 40, the determining module 201, the calculating module 202, the obtaining module 203, and the creating module 204 are the same as those in the above embodiment, and are not described herein again.

获取子模块2031,用于获取颜色可调光源的辐通量。The obtaining sub-module 2031 is configured to obtain a radiant flux of the color tunable light source.

第一计算子模块2032,用于根据颜色可调光源的辐通量,计算出颜色可调光源的光通量。The first calculating sub-module 2032 is configured to calculate a luminous flux of the color tunable light source according to the radiant flux of the color tunable light source.

第二计算子模块2033,用于根据颜色可调光源的光通量,计算出颜色可调光源对应的调光信号数据。The second calculating sub-module 2033 is configured to calculate dimming signal data corresponding to the color tunable light source according to the luminous flux of the color tunable light source.

实施例8Example 8

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制的装置,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图31是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制装置的示 意图,如图31所示,该装置包括:第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40和控制单元50。According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a device for lighting control, the color tunable light source in this embodiment being equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. Figure 31 is a diagram showing a lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. Intended, as shown in FIG. 31, the apparatus includes: a first acquisition unit 10, a first search unit 20, a second search unit 30, a second acquisition unit 40, and a control unit 50.

第一获取单元10用于获取目标物体的颜色参数。The first obtaining unit 10 is configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object.

第一查找单元20用于在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本,其中,第一预设数据库中预存有对应于不同颜色参数的颜色样本。The first searching unit 20 is configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where the color samples corresponding to the different color parameters are pre-stored in the first preset database.

第二查找单元30用于第二预设数据库中查找与目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据。The second searching unit 30 is configured to search for dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, wherein the second preset database prestores dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples.

第二获取单元40用于对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号。The second obtaining unit 40 is configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal.

控制单元50用于灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强。The control unit 50 is configured to control the color adjustable light source illumination by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object.

本发明实施例提供的照明控制装置,第一获取单元10用于获取目标物体的颜色参数,第一查找单元20用于在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本,其中,第一预设数据库中预存有对应于不同颜色参数的颜色样本,第二查找单元30用于第二预设数据库中查找与目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据,第二获取单元40用于对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号,控制单元50用于灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的目标颜色得到增强。在该照明控制装置中,通过直接查找调光信号数据,而不需要在线大量计算得到调光信号数据,因此提升了自动识别目标物体的颜色来调节灯光以增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。In the illumination control device provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the first acquiring unit 10 is configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object, and the first searching unit 20 is configured to search for a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, where The color data sample corresponding to the different color parameters is pre-stored in a preset database, and the second search unit 30 is configured to search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database, where the second preset database is pre-stored. There is dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples, and the second obtaining unit 40 is configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal, and the control unit 50 is configured to control the color adjustable light source by the light driving signal. The light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color tunable light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object. In the illumination control device, by directly searching for the dimming signal data, it is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data in a large amount online, thereby improving the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object.

图32是根据本发明第五实施例的一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图,如图32所示,该装置包括:第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40和控制单元50。其中,第一获取单元10还包括:第一获取模块101、处理模块102、第一确定模块103、第二确定模块104、第三确定模块105和转换模块106。32 is a schematic diagram of an optional lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 32, the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, a second searching unit 30, The second acquisition unit 40 and the control unit 50. The first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first obtaining module 101, a processing module 102, a first determining module 103, a second determining module 104, a third determining module 105, and a converting module 106.

第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40和控制单元50的作用与上述实施例中作用相同,在此不再赘述。The functions of the first obtaining unit 10, the first searching unit 20, the second searching unit 30, the second obtaining unit 40, and the control unit 50 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.

第一获取模块101用于获取目标物体的图像。The first acquisition module 101 is configured to acquire an image of the target object.

处理模块102用于对目标物体的图像执行白平衡处理,获取处理后的目标物体的图像。The processing module 102 is configured to perform white balance processing on the image of the target object, and acquire an image of the processed target object.

第一确定模块103用于确定处理后的目标物体的图像中的目标区域。The first determining module 103 is configured to determine a target area in the image of the processed target object.

第二确定模块104用于确定目标区域的主色彩。The second determining module 104 is configured to determine a primary color of the target area.

第三确定模块105用于确定目标区域主色彩的颜色分量值。The third determining module 105 is configured to determine a color component value of the main color of the target area.

转换模块106用于将颜色分量值转换为色调值和饱和度值。Conversion module 106 is operative to convert color component values to tone values and saturation values.

图33是根据本发明第五实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图,如图33所示,该装置包括:第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40和控制单元50。其中,第一获取单元10还包括:第一获取模块101、处理 模块102、第一确定模块103、第二确定模块104、第三确定模块105和转换模块106。第二确定模块104还包括:第一获取子模块1041、第一确定子模块1042、第二获取子模块1043和第二确定子模块1044。33 is a schematic diagram of another optional lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 33, the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, and a second searching unit 30. The second acquisition unit 40 and the control unit 50. The first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first acquiring module 101, and processing The module 102, the first determining module 103, the second determining module 104, the third determining module 105, and the converting module 106. The second determining module 104 further includes: a first obtaining submodule 1041, a first determining submodule 1042, a second obtaining submodule 1043, and a second determining submodule 1044.

第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40、控制单元50、第一获取模块101、处理模块102、第一确定模块103、第二确定模块104、第三确定模块105和转换模块106的作用与上述实施例中作用相同,在此不再赘述。The first obtaining unit 10, the first searching unit 20, the second searching unit 30, the second obtaining unit 40, the control unit 50, the first obtaining module 101, the processing module 102, the first determining module 103, the second determining module 104, The functions of the third determining module 105 and the converting module 106 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.

第一获取子模块1041用于获取目标物体的图像中的像素点,其中,像素点包括多个像素点。The first acquisition sub-module 1041 is configured to acquire pixel points in an image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points.

第一确定子模块1042用于确定像素点的多个颜色向量,其中,多个颜色向量中不同的颜色向量对应多个像素点中不同的像素点。The first determining sub-module 1042 is configured to determine a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein different color vectors of the plurality of color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixel points.

第二获取子模块1043用于对多个颜色向量执行平均计算,得到平均向量。The second obtaining sub-module 1043 is configured to perform an averaging calculation on the plurality of color vectors to obtain an average vector.

第二确定子模块1044用于将平均向量确定为目标区域的主色彩。The second determination sub-module 1044 is configured to determine the average vector as the primary color of the target area.

图34是根据本发明第五实施例的另一种可选地照明控制装置的示意图,如图34所示,该装置包括:第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40和控制单元50。其中,第一获取单元10还包括:第一获取模块101、处理模块102、第一确定模块103、第二确定模块104、第三确定模块105和转换模块106。第二确定模块104还包括:第三获取子模块1045、第三确定子模块1046、统计子模块1047和第四获取子模块1048。FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of another alternative lighting control apparatus according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 34, the apparatus includes: a first acquiring unit 10, a first searching unit 20, and a second searching unit 30. The second acquisition unit 40 and the control unit 50. The first obtaining unit 10 further includes: a first obtaining module 101, a processing module 102, a first determining module 103, a second determining module 104, a third determining module 105, and a converting module 106. The second determining module 104 further includes: a third obtaining submodule 1045, a third determining submodule 1046, a statistic submodule 1047, and a fourth obtaining submodule 1048.

第一获取单元10、第一查找单元20、第二查找单元30、第二获取单元40、控制单元50、第一获取模块101、处理模块102、第一确定模块103、第二确定模块104、第三确定模块105和转换模块106的作用与上述实施例中作用相同,在此不再赘述。The first obtaining unit 10, the first searching unit 20, the second searching unit 30, the second obtaining unit 40, the control unit 50, the first obtaining module 101, the processing module 102, the first determining module 103, the second determining module 104, The functions of the third determining module 105 and the converting module 106 are the same as those in the foregoing embodiment, and are not described herein again.

第三获取子模块1045用于获取目标物体的图像中的像素点,其中,像素点包括多个像素点。The third obtaining sub-module 1045 is configured to acquire pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points.

第三确定子模块1046用于确定像素点的多个颜色向量,其中,多个颜色向量中不同的颜色向量对应多个像素点中不同的像素点。The third determining sub-module 1046 is configured to determine a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein different color vectors of the plurality of color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixel points.

统计子模块1047用于统计颜色向量在所有颜色向量中的比例。Statistics sub-module 1047 is used to count the proportion of color vectors in all color vectors.

第四获取子模块1048用于获取比例最高的颜色向量,将颜色向量确定为目标区域的主色彩。The fourth obtaining sub-module 1048 is configured to obtain the highest-priority color vector, and determine the color vector as the main color of the target area.

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制系统。需要说明的是,本发明实施例的照明控制系可以用于执行本发明实施例所提供的照明控制方法。图35是根据本发明第一实施例的照明控制系统的示意图,如图35所示,该系统包括:照明体10;以及总控制器20,用于获取照明体的调光信号,并按照调光信号控制照明体发光。According to an embodiment of the invention, a lighting control system is also provided. It should be noted that the illumination control system of the embodiment of the present invention may be used to perform the illumination control method provided by the embodiment of the present invention. 35 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 35, the system includes: an illuminating body 10; and a total controller 20 for acquiring a dimming signal of the illuminating body, and adjusting according to The light signal controls the illumination of the illumination body.

通过该实施例的照明控制系统,可以实现增强待测物表面颜色饱和度的技术效果,进而解决了现有的灯光控制技术不能定量准确地增强被照待测物的色彩的技术问题。Through the illumination control system of the embodiment, the technical effect of enhancing the color saturation of the surface of the object to be tested can be realized, thereby solving the technical problem that the existing light control technology cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

实施例9Example 9

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制系统,图36是根据本发明第二实施例 的照明控制系统的示意图,如图36所示,该系统包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control system, and FIG. 36 is a second embodiment according to the present invention. A schematic diagram of a lighting control system, as shown in Figure 36, the system includes:

存储器1100,用于存储照明体各颜色通道光谱、照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;The memory 1100 is configured to store a spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, a reference source of the illuminating body, a reference source color coordinate, and a reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested;

控制器1300,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型,使用测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标,使用照明体光谱类型从存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,根据参考光源、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号。The controller 1300 is configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectral type of the illuminating body, and use the reflectivity type of the surface of the measuring object to query the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested. Using the reference source color temperature to query from the memory to obtain the reference source of the illuminant, the reference source color coordinates, and use the illuminant spectrum type to query the illuminator color channel spectrum from the memory, according to the reference source, the reference source color coordinates, the object to be tested The reflectance distribution of the surface and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator are used to calculate the radiant flux, and the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body is obtained; and the target radiant flux is converted into the dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body.

照明体1400,用于为待测物提供可调色光源。The illuminating body 1400 is configured to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested.

本申请上述实施例中,使用事先存储的待测待测物表面反射率分布,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光约束为白光,待测物在上述白光的照射下颜色饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩饱和度而且同时使待测物周围待测物颜色失真的问题。In the above embodiment of the present application, the surface reflectance distribution of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source are used to adjust the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body, so that the output light of the illuminating body is constrained to white light. The color saturation of the object to be tested is enhanced under the illumination of the above white light, and the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to the object to be tested. The color cannot accurately and quantitatively enhance the color saturation of the object to be tested and at the same time distort the color of the object to be tested around the object to be tested.

通过本发明实施例的分析,可以获知本申请欲保护的核心创新点包括:Through the analysis of the embodiments of the present invention, it can be known that the core innovation points to be protected by the present application include:

一种通过优化光源输出光的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱分布和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据某一设定参考灯光颜色,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强。同时系统输出光是白光,同时,根据所选参考灯光色温全自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。在光源光谱合适的情况下,可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色饱和度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。系统输出光是白光,不会使被照物周围待测物颜色失真。A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a sample to be measured by optimizing the spectrum of light output from the source. The system and method obtain the optimal dimming signal and adjust the light spectrum of the light source according to the spectral distribution of the color channels of the light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested. The color saturation of the object under test under the reference light is enhanced. At the same time, the output light of the system is white light. At the same time, the spectrum of the illumination source is fully adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature, and the operation is simple. In the case where the spectrum of the light source is suitable, the effect of the color saturation of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested can be accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light. The output light of the system is white light, which will not distort the color of the object to be tested around the object.

下面就本申请的实施方案在具体应用场景下的应用进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application of the implementation of the present application in a specific application scenario:

一个典型实施例的系统如图6所示。用户事先测照明灯具中每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。待测物表面的反射率数据可以是出厂预设的标准反射率数据或者用户实时测得的反射率,也存在存储器中。同时,参考光源分布也存在存储器当中。在使用时,用户指定使用哪种待测物反射率数据,灯具光谱类型和参考光源色温,由用户界面将信息传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据,参考光源和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器实现如下算法,计算出调光信号传给光源的各颜色通道。A system of an exemplary embodiment is shown in FIG. The user has previously measured the spectral distribution of each color channel in the lighting fixture in memory. The reflectance data of the surface of the object to be tested may be factory preset standard reflectance data or reflectance measured by the user in real time, and is also stored in the memory. At the same time, the reference light source distribution is also present in the memory. In use, the user specifies which analyte reflectance data to use, the luminaire spectral type and the reference source color temperature, and the information is transmitted to the controller by the user interface. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested in the memory, and refers to the spectral distribution data of the color channels of the light source and the illumination source. The controller implements an algorithm that calculates the color channels that the dimming signal is transmitted to the light source.

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory.

照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备。不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。图7为用户输入上述参考光源的软件界面。一旦用户选定参考光源的 光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如表格1所示,表格1为待测物在不同色温的光源下的色坐标。The spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device. The spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. Figure 7 is a software interface for the user to input the above reference light source. Once the user selects the reference source The spectrum and the reflectance of the object to be measured are calculated according to the true color of the object to be measured, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 1, Table 1 is the color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources.

表格1:待测物在不同色温的光源下的色坐标Table 1: Color coordinates of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000163
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000163

以皮包为例,带白光约束的增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested with white light constraint is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图8所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图9和图10所示。1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 8. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the illumination fixture are shown in Figures 9 and 10.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图11所示。其中色域由三角形围出,白光区域为三角形内的四边形表示。R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, and the white light region is represented by a quadrangle within a triangle. R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3127, 0.3290), O represents the color coordinate point of the bag under the D65 reference source, the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O * represents the bag under the lighting fixture. The color point that reaches the maximum saturation, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.建立优化问题。这里k=0.2567,b=0.2487,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。3. Establish optimization issues. Here k = 0.2067, b = 0.2487, the luminous flux converted to the 1W radiant flux of the four channels is [311, 174, 482, 46.4] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] ( Corresponding to WRGB).

4.解优化问题得最优解辐通量向量为[1.6665,0,0.2643,0.3794](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(88%,0%,98%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。优化得到的待测物颜色点的色坐标是(0.3668,0.3429),在图11中用O‘表示,优化得到的灯光颜色点的色坐标是(0.3351,0.3345),在图11中用L表示。可以看到灯光颜色点在白光区域的边界上。4. The optimal solution flux vector for solution optimization problem is [1.6665, 0, 0.2643, 0.3794] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signals converted to four channels are (88%, 0%, 98%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The color coordinate of the optimized color point of the object to be tested is (0.3668, 0.3429), which is represented by O' in Fig. 11, and the color coordinate of the optimized color point of the light is (0.3351, 0.3345), which is represented by L in Fig. 11. . You can see that the light color points on the boundary of the white light area.

根据以上流程可以得到被照物体在不同参考光源下优化得到的PWM值,表格2以 6500K参考光源为例,给出表1中四个物体对应的颜色增强之后的颜色色坐标,灯光色坐标,灯具PWM驱动信号。According to the above process, the PWM value obtained by the illuminated object under different reference light sources can be obtained, and Table 2 Taking the 6500K reference light source as an example, the color color coordinates, the light color coordinates, and the lamp PWM driving signal of the four objects corresponding to the four objects in Table 1 are given.

表格3:对应不同物体在6500K参考光源下的优化结果Table 3: Optimization results for different objects under 6500K reference source

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000164
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000164

实施例10Example 10

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制系统,图37是根据本发明第三实施例的照明控制系统的示意图,如图37所示,该系统包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control system, and FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of a lighting control system according to a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 37, the system includes:

存储器1101,用于存储光源各颜色通道光谱、照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布;The memory 1101 is configured to store a spectrum of each color channel of the light source, a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a spectral color coordinate of the reference light source, and a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested;

传感器1103,用于通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,身份识别标志关联待测物;a sensor 1103, configured to transmit an identifier to the controller by sensing, wherein the identifier is associated with the object to be tested;

具体的,上述身份识别标志可以置于待测物的表面,可以是条形码或二维码,每个身份识别标志对应一个待测物,上述目标饱和度d可以是待测物表面颜色的饱和度,可以是用户期望通过照明体的照射,待测物表面的颜色所达到的颜色饱和度。可以采用的传感器1103通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,身份识别标志关联待测物。Specifically, the foregoing identification mark may be placed on the surface of the object to be tested, and may be a barcode or a two-dimensional code, each of the identification marks corresponding to one object to be tested, and the target saturation d may be the saturation of the surface color of the object to be tested. It may be the color saturation that the user desires to achieve by the illumination of the illuminating body and the color of the surface of the object to be tested. The sensor 1103 that can be employed transmits the identification flag to the controller by sensing, wherein the identification flag is associated with the object to be tested.

控制器1105,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d使用身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到待测物表面的反射率分布;使用参考光源色温从存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和光源各颜色通道光谱,根据目标饱和度d、相应的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和光源各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到照明体对应的目标辐通量;将目标辐通量转化成照明体提供的各个光源通道的调光信号。The controller 1105 is configured to receive an identifier of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user, and use the identification mark to query the reflectivity distribution of the surface of the object to be tested from the memory; The reference source color temperature is queried from the memory to obtain the reference source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source spectral color coordinate, and the color channel color spectrum of the light source, according to the target saturation d, the corresponding reference source spectrum, the reference source spectral color coordinate, and the surface of the object to be tested. The reflectance distribution and the spectrum of each color channel of the light source are calculated by the radiant flux to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; the target radiant flux is converted into the dimming signal of each light source channel provided by the illuminating body.

照明体1107,用于为待测物提供可调色光源。The illuminating body 1107 is configured to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested.

具体的,可以采用实施例三中的存储器1101预先存储光源各颜色通道光谱、参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布,这里需要说明的是,步骤S101中用户输入的参考色温对应上述存储器中的光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和光源各 颜色通道光谱。Specifically, the memory 1101 of the third embodiment may be used to pre-store the color channel spectrum, the reference source spectrum, the reference source color coordinate, and the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested. Here, the user input in step S101 is required. The reference color temperature corresponds to the spectrum of the light source in the above memory, the spectral color coordinates of the reference source, and the light source Color channel spectrum.

本申请上述实施例中,控制器1105使用事先存储的被照待测物表面反射率,照明体的光谱分布,和参考光源的色温来调节照明体输出光的光谱,使得在照明体输出光的照射下,待测物在参考灯光下的颜色的饱和度得到了增强的同时色调不改变,解决了现有的灯光控制技术只提高灯光本身的光色品质或简单的将灯光颜色更换为待测物的颜色,不能定量准确的增强被照待测物的色彩的问题。In the above embodiment of the present application, the controller 1105 adjusts the spectrum of the output light of the illuminating body by using the previously stored surface reflectance of the object to be tested, the spectral distribution of the illuminating body, and the color temperature of the reference light source, so that the light is outputted in the illuminating body. Under illumination, the saturation of the color of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color tone is not changed, which solves the problem that the existing light control technology only improves the light color quality of the light itself or simply changes the color of the light to be tested. The color of the object cannot quantitatively and accurately enhance the color of the object to be tested.

下面就本申请在具体应用场景下进行详细描述:The following is a detailed description of the application in a specific application scenario:

这个发明专利包括以下方法和步骤:This invention patent includes the following methods and steps:

本系统包括一个颜色可调光源,传感器,存储器和控制器。光源中包含二种或二种以上颜色的发光体,比如发光二级管(LED)。光源中的每组同色发光体用同一个电流或电压信号控制。在这里称光源中一个或多个相同颜色的发光体为一个颜色通道。The system includes a color tunable light source, sensor, memory and controller. The light source includes two or more colors of illuminants, such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Each set of homochromatic illuminants in the source is controlled by the same current or voltage signal. One or more illuminants of the same color in the source are referred to herein as a color channel.

事先测得待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源中每个颜色通道的光谱分布。待测物表面的反射率分布和照明光源每个颜色通道的光谱分布存在存储器当中。目标待测物表面有身份识别标志,比如条形码,传感器通过感应身份识别标志将信号传给控制器。控制器在存储器中调出相应的待测物表面反射率数据和照明光源各颜色通道的光谱分布数据。控制器接收用户传来的参考灯光色温值和期望增加的饱和度水平,然后在存储器中调出相应的参考灯光光谱,实现如下算法,最后计算出调光信号传给光源的各颜色通道。系统框图如图14所示。The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel in the illumination source are measured in advance. The reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution of each color channel of the illumination source are stored in the memory. The surface of the target object to be tested has an identification mark, such as a barcode, and the sensor transmits the signal to the controller by sensing the identification mark. The controller calls the corresponding surface reflectance data of the object to be tested and the spectral distribution data of each color channel of the illumination source in the memory. The controller receives the reference light color temperature value sent by the user and the desired increased saturation level, and then calls the corresponding reference light spectrum in the memory to implement the following algorithm, and finally calculates the color channels that the dimming signal transmits to the light source. The system block diagram is shown in Figure 14.

根据现有色度学公式,对于在一个照明体下的待测物,它表面颜色的三刺激值CIEXYZ可由待测物表面反射光谱,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,各通路相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, for a test object under a illuminating body, the tristimulus value CIEXYZ of its surface color can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, the CIE human eye tristimulus value function, the relative spectral distribution of each channel and the radiant The quantity vector p is used to represent.

根据现有色度学公式,可将CIE XYZ的表达式转换成CIE1931 xy色坐标的表达式。实际上当光源有n个颜色通道,在此光源照射下的待测物的颜色可以看作是待测物在光源中每个单色颜色通道的照射下达到的各颜色的混合。因此CIE1931xy色度图上,在只有一个光源的情况下,所能达到的待测物颜色点只能在待测物分别被n个颜色通道照射下的颜色点组成的色域内。同时,当被照待测物反射率和光源光谱确定,此待测物在此光源下的颜色范围也是确定的。比如光源由红绿蓝三种颜色LED组成,R,G,B分别表示被照待测物在白光LED,红光LED,绿光LED,蓝光LED照射下的颜色值。图13显示由R,G,B三个点连线围成的待测物颜色范围。即表示此光源所能渲染的待测物的颜色值的坐标点只能落在R,G,B三点连线围成的三角形内。设待测物在参考灯光下颜色的CIE1931xy色坐标为(xo,yo),将参考灯光光谱能量分布和待测物反射率分布代入式(1-5)则可得到(xo,yo)。由色度学我们可知,在参考灯光颜色点(xr,yr)和待测物颜色点(xo,yo)的连线上所有的颜色点色相一致。颜色点离参考灯光颜色越远,该颜色的饱和度就越高。点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000165
表示在此光源下待测物所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点。不难看出点
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000166
应是(xr,yr)和(xo,yo)的连线和上述三角形颜色范围的交点,如图13所示。According to the existing colorimetric formula, the expression of CIE XYZ can be converted into an expression of CIE1931 xy color coordinates. In fact, when the light source has n color channels, the color of the object to be tested illuminated by the light source can be regarded as a mixture of colors reached by the object to be tested under illumination of each of the monochromatic color channels in the light source. Therefore, on the CIE1931xy chromaticity diagram, in the case of only one light source, the color point of the object to be tested can only be achieved in the color gamut where the object to be tested is respectively illuminated by the color points of the n color channels. At the same time, when the reflectance of the analyte and the spectrum of the light source are determined, the color range of the object under the light source is also determined. For example, the light source is composed of three colors of red, green and blue LEDs, and R, G, and B respectively represent the color values of the object to be tested under the illumination of the white LED, the red LED, the green LED, and the blue LED. Figure 13 shows the range of color of the object to be tested enclosed by the three points R, G, and B. That is, the coordinate point indicating the color value of the object to be tested that can be rendered by this light source can only fall within the triangle surrounded by the three points of R, G, and B. Let the CIE1931xy color coordinate of the object under the reference light be (x o , y o ), and substitute the reference light spectral energy distribution and the reflectance distribution of the test object into the formula (1-5) to obtain (x o , y o ). From colorimetry, we can see that all the color points of the reference light color point (x r , y r ) and the color point of the object to be tested (x o , y o ) are consistent. The farther the color point is from the reference light color, the higher the saturation of the color. point
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000165
Indicates the color point at which the object under test can reach maximum saturation. It’s not hard to see
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000166
It should be the intersection of the line of (x r , y r ) and (x o , y o ) and the above-mentioned triangle color range, as shown in FIG.

这里点

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000167
的饱和度增加的水平被认为为100%。设d为期望增加的饱和度水 平,用百分数表示。设期望达到的颜色色坐标为(x’o,y’o),则(x’o,y’o)可以用下式计算。Here
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000167
The level of increase in saturation is considered to be 100%. Let d be the desired level of saturation, expressed as a percentage. Let the color coordinate coordinates expected to be (x' o , y' o ), then (x' o , y' o ) can be calculated by the following formula.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000168
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000168
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000169
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000169

建立三个约束条件对辐通量向量p的取值范围进行限定。其中所述约束条件包括:Three constraints are established to define the range of values of the radiant flux vector p. The constraints include:

约束条件一:照明体各颜色通道的总辐通量大于0。Constraint 1: The total radiant flux of each color channel of the illuminator is greater than zero.

约束条件二:照明体各颜色通道的光通量不大于该通道的最大光通量。Constraint 2: The luminous flux of each color channel of the illuminating body is not greater than the maximum luminous flux of the channel.

约束条件三:待测物的在照明体提供的光源下的色坐标(x,y)向量能够与(x′o,y′o)进行匹配。Constraint 3: The color coordinate (x, y) vector of the object under test can be matched with ( x'o , y'o ).

有多个辐通量向量p的解在被限定的取值范围内,通过建立最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量的目标在限定的取值范围内寻找最优解。该过程由建立一个线性规划问题实现。The solution with multiple radiant flux vectors p is within the defined range of values, finding the optimal solution within a defined range of values by establishing a goal that maximizes the total luminous flux of all color channels. This process is achieved by establishing a linear programming problem.

这里需要说明的是,这里目标可以是任何一个与辐通量向量p有关的目标方程。比如最大化所有颜色通道的总光通量,最大化光效,最大化CRI等。在限定的取值范围内决定最优解的过程可以通过建立线性规划问题来实现,或者由其他方法来实现,比如在取值范围内遍历所有有效解寻找最优解等。It should be noted here that the target here can be any target equation related to the radiation flux vector p. For example, maximizing the total luminous flux of all color channels, maximizing light efficiency, maximizing CRI, etc. The process of determining the optimal solution within a limited range of values can be achieved by establishing a linear programming problem, or by other methods, such as traversing all valid solutions in the range of values to find the optimal solution.

每个通道的光通量Φi与辐通量满足以下关系式:Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n其中Φvi是第i个通道1W的辐通量转换的光通量,pi是向量p的第i个分量。The luminous flux Φ i and the radiant flux of each channel satisfy the following relationship: Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n where Φ vi is the luminous flux converted by the radii of the i-th channel 1W, p i is the ith component of the vector p.

因此最大化

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000170
即可得目标方程。Maximize
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000170
The target equation can be obtained.

令Φvi·pi小于等于第i个通道的最大光通量,即可得到第二个约束条件。Let Φ vi ·p i be less than or equal to the maximum luminous flux of the i-th channel, and the second constraint can be obtained.

同时,由现有的色度学公式,在一个照明体下的待测物表面颜色的xy色坐标向量可由待测物表面反射函数,CIE人眼三刺激值函数,该照明体各通道的相对光谱分布和辐通量向量p来表示。令该xy色坐标表达式等于目标色坐标向量(x’o,y’o),即可得到第三个约束条件。得到各颜色通道的辐通量最优解后,各个通道的光通量Φi可由Φi=Φvi·pi,i=1,…,n计算得出。由发光体的特性可由Φi计算每个颜色通道的调光信号。比如LED芯片在稳定的状态下电流值与光通量成正比关系,由事先标定的比例系数可由Φi计算出第i个通道的调光信号值。以上介绍的方法流程图见图15。具体为:At the same time, from the existing colorimetric formula, the xy color coordinate vector of the surface color of the object under test in an illuminating body can be reflected by the surface of the object to be tested, CIE human eye tristimulus value function, and the relative of each channel of the illuminating body The spectral distribution and the radiant flux vector p are represented. Let the xy color coordinate expression be equal to the target color coordinate vector (x' o , y' o ), and the third constraint condition can be obtained. After obtaining the optimal solution of the radiant flux of each color channel, the luminous flux Φ i of each channel can be calculated by Φ i = Φ vi · p i , i = 1, ..., n. The dimming signal of each color channel can be calculated from Φ i by the characteristics of the illuminant. For example, the current value of the LED chip is proportional to the luminous flux in a stable state, and the dimming signal value of the i-th channel can be calculated from the Φ i by the scale factor previously calibrated. The flow chart of the method described above is shown in Figure 15. Specifically:

步骤10,接收用户传来的参考光源色温和期望增加的饱和度水平。 Step 10: Receive a reference light source color temperature and a desired increased saturation level from the user.

步骤20,调出待测物反射率光谱,光源各颜色通道光谱和参考光源光谱。In step 20, the reflectance spectrum of the analyte, the spectrum of each color channel of the light source and the spectrum of the reference source are called.

步骤30,计算待测物在参考灯光下的最大饱和度颜色点的坐标值。Step 30: Calculate a coordinate value of a maximum saturation color point of the object under test light.

步骤40,根据期望增加的饱和度水平计算出目标颜色点的坐标值。In step 40, the coordinate value of the target color point is calculated according to the desired saturation level.

步骤50,建立求解优化问题14,求得各通道辐通量。In step 50, a solution optimization problem 14 is established to determine the flux of each channel.

步骤60,将各通道辐通量转化成各通道的调光信号。In step 60, the flux of each channel is converted into a dimming signal of each channel.

本发明欲保护的核心创新点包括:The core innovations to be protected by the present invention include:

一种通过调节照明光源的光谱来增加被照待测物颜色饱和度的系统和方法。这种系统和方法在取得光源各颜色通道的光谱,参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率函数后,根据用户期望的饱和度增加水平,建立线性优化问题,计算出最优的调光信号,调节光源的灯光光谱,使得被照待测物在参考灯光下的颜色饱和度得到增强的同时颜色色相不发生改变A system and method for increasing the color saturation of a test object by adjusting the spectrum of the illumination source. The system and method obtain the spectrum of each color channel of the light source, the spectrum of the reference light source and the reflectivity function of the object to be tested, and establish a linear optimization problem according to the saturation level of the user desired to calculate the optimal tone. The light signal adjusts the light spectrum of the light source so that the color saturation of the object under the reference light is enhanced while the color hue does not change.

本发明具有以下优点:The invention has the following advantages:

根据所选参考灯光色温和期望饱和度增加水平自动调节照明光源的光谱,操作简单。可以达到被照待测物在参考灯光下颜色鲜艳度得到增强的效果,并且使被照待测物的颜色色相精确地和在参考灯光下的颜色色相保持一致。The spectrum of the illumination source is automatically adjusted according to the selected reference light color temperature and the desired saturation increase level, and the operation is simple. The effect of the color intensity of the object under test under the reference light can be enhanced, and the color hue of the object to be tested is accurately aligned with the color hue under the reference light.

下面以皮包在照明灯下为例进行详细阐述:The following is a detailed description of the bag under the lighting:

待测物的反射率光谱可以由用户实际测得然后输入设备,或者采用事先存在存储器中的该种待测物的标准反射率光谱。照明灯具各颜色通道的光谱由用户事先测得然后输入设备。不同色温参考光源的光谱使用不同色温的标准照明体的光谱,色温由用户选择。参考光源的光谱也可以由用户手动输入。如图16所示,图16可以为用户选择照明体色温参考光源光谱的软件界面示意图。The reflectance spectrum of the analyte can be measured by the user and then input to the device, or a standard reflectance spectrum of the analyte to be present in the memory. The spectrum of each color channel of the luminaire is measured by the user before input to the device. The spectra of different color temperature reference sources use the spectrum of standard illuminators of different color temperatures, and the color temperature is selected by the user. The spectrum of the reference source can also be manually entered by the user. As shown in FIG. 16, FIG. 16 may be a software interface diagram for a user to select a spectrum of a illuminating body color temperature reference source.

一旦用户选定参考光源的光谱和被照待测物的反射率,则被照待测物的真实颜色可以计算得到,这里由CIE1931xy色坐标来表示。如下表格3所示,表格3是皮包在不同参考光源下达到的色坐标。Once the user selects the spectrum of the reference source and the reflectivity of the object to be tested, the true color of the object to be tested can be calculated, which is represented by CIE1931xy color coordinates. As shown in Table 3 below, Table 3 is the color coordinates achieved by the purse under different reference sources.

表格3:待测物在不同色温的光源下的真实颜色Table 3: True color of the object under test at different color temperature sources

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000171
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000171

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000172
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000172

新的目标颜色是在待测物的真实颜色的基础上由饱和度增加水平d得到,这里d的数值范围由0-100%,由用户决定。The new target color is obtained from the saturation increase level d based on the true color of the object to be tested, where the value of d ranges from 0-100%, which is determined by the user.

以皮包为例,增强待测物颜色鲜艳度的方法流程如下:Taking the bag as an example, the method for enhancing the color vividness of the object to be tested is as follows:

1.用户选择皮包的反射率,照明光源光谱和参考光源。假设用户选择了6500K的参考光源,则皮包的真实颜色的xy色坐标是(0.3455,0.3374)。皮包反射率数据如图17所示。设照明灯具有WRGB(white,red,green,blue)四个通道。参考光源和照明灯具四个通道的光谱如图18和图19所示。1. The user selects the reflectivity of the bag, the illumination source spectrum and the reference source. Assuming that the user selects a reference light source of 6500K, the xy color coordinate of the true color of the bag is (0.3455, 0.3374). The bag reflectance data is shown in Figure 17. The lighting has four channels of WRGB (white, red, green, blue). The spectra of the four channels of the reference source and the luminaire are shown in Figures 18 and 19.

2.由灯具四通道的光谱和待测物反射率光谱算出待测物在该灯下的色域,如图20所示。其中色域由三角形围出,R代表D65参考光源的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3127,0.3290),O代表皮包在D65参考光源下的色坐标点,坐标为(0.3455,0.3374),O*代表皮包在此照明灯具下所能达到最大饱和度的颜色点,坐标为(0.5783,0.3972)。2. Calculate the color gamut of the object under test by the spectrum of the four channels of the luminaire and the reflectance spectrum of the object to be tested, as shown in FIG. The color gamut is surrounded by a triangle, R represents the color coordinate point of the D65 reference light source, the coordinates are (0.3127, 0.3290), and O represents the color coordinate point of the leather bag under the D65 reference light source, and the coordinates are (0.3455, 0.3374), and O * represents The color point of the bag that can reach the maximum saturation under this lighting fixture, the coordinates are (0.5783, 0.3972).

3.设用户界面传来的饱和度水平为20%,目标颜色点等于[0.3455,0.3374]+([0.5783,0.3972]-[0.3455,0.3374])*0.2=[0.3920,0.3494]。3. Set the saturation level from the user interface to 20%, and the target color point to be equal to [0.3455, 0.3374] + ([0.5783, 0.3972] - [0.3455, 0.3374]) * 0.2 = [0.3920, 0.3494].

4.根据目标颜色点的色坐标计算k1,k2,k3,建立优化问题(14)。这里,4. Calculate k 1 , k 2 , k 3 according to the color coordinates of the target color point, and establish an optimization problem (14). Here,

k1=[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757]T,k 1 =[0.3899,1.8063,-0.9731,-1.9757] T ,

k2=[0.2602,-0.27000,-1.6757,-2.5521]T,k 2 = [0.2602, -0.27000, -1.6757, -2.5521] T ,

k3=[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643]T,四个通道每1W辐通量转为的光通量是[311,174,482,46.4](分别对应WRGB),每个通道的最大光通量为[205.9,24.3,51.2,6.4](分别对应WRGB)。k 3 =[5.9001,5.9449,4.6202,8.1643] T , the luminous flux converted into the flux of 1W per channel is [311,174,482,46.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively), and the maximum luminous flux per channel is [205.9, 24.3, 51.2, 6.4] (corresponding to WRGB respectively).

5.解优化问题(14)得最优解辐通量向量为[0.6621,0.0578,0.1062,0.1311](分别对应WRGB)。转化为四个通道的PWM调光信号为(99%,40%,100%,94%)(分别对应WRGB)。5. Solution optimization problem (14) The optimal solution flux vector is [0.6621, 0.0578, 0.1062, 0.1311] (corresponding to WRGB, respectively). The PWM dimming signal converted to four channels is (99%, 40%, 100%, 94%) (corresponding to WRGB, respectively).

据以上流程可以得到待测物在不同参考光源下不同饱和度水平对应的PWM值,这里以6500K参考光源为例,给出表3中四个待测物在四个不同饱和度水平下对应的PWM值According to the above process, the PWM values corresponding to different saturation levels of the test object under different reference light sources can be obtained. Here, taking the 6500K reference light source as an example, the four test objects in Table 3 are corresponding to the four different saturation levels. PWM value

表格4对应不同待测物在6500K参考光源下不同饱和度水平的PWM调光信号Table 4 corresponds to the PWM dimming signal of different saturation levels of different analytes under the 6500K reference light source.

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000173
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000173

Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000174
Figure PCTCN2015086676-appb-000174

实施例11Example 11

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制系统,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图38是根据本发明第四实施例的照明控制系统的示意图,如图38所示,该系统包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control system, the color tunable light source in this embodiment being equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. Figure 38 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fourth embodiment of the present invention, as shown in Figure 38, the system comprising:

存储器100、颜色可调光源200和控制器300。The memory 100, the color tunable light source 200, and the controller 300.

存储器100,用于存储预设数据库,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据。The memory 100 is configured to store a preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors.

颜色可调光源200,用于为目标物体提供光源。A color tunable light source 200 for providing a light source to a target object.

控制器300,用于接收目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色,在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。The controller 300 is configured to receive a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the target light color temperature value is searched in the preset database. The dimming signal data corresponding to the target color is obtained from the dimmed signal data obtained by the search, and the color driving light source is controlled by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source. The target color of the target object is enhanced, and the color temperature value of the light emitted by the color adjustable light source is controlled to be the color temperature value of the target light.

本发明实施例提供的照明控制系统,通过存储器100存储预设数据库,其中,预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据。颜色可调光源200为目标物体提供光源。控制器300接收目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色,在预设数据库中查找与目标灯光色温值和目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值。在该系统中,由于控制器控制颜色可调光源发光,颜色可调光源发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,该控制器控制颜色可调光源发出的灯光的色温值为目标灯光的色温值,保证了灯光渲染品质的同时实现增强目标物体颜色。The lighting control system provided by the embodiment of the present invention stores a preset database through the memory 100, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors. The color tunable light source 200 provides a light source for the target object. The controller 300 receives the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is the color temperature value of the target light, the target color refers to the color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the target light color temperature value and the target color are searched in the preset database. Corresponding dimming signal data, the dimming signal data obtained by the finding obtains a light driving signal, and the color driving light source is controlled by the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the color adjustable light source to make the target object The target color is enhanced, and the color temperature of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source is controlled to be the color temperature value of the target light. In the system, since the controller controls the color-adjustable light source to emit light, the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source enhances the target color of the target object, and the controller controls the color temperature of the light emitted by the color-adjustable light source to be the color temperature of the target light. The value ensures the quality of the light rendering while enhancing the color of the target object.

实施例12Example 12

根据本发明实施例,还提供了一种照明控制系统,该实施例中的颜色可调光源与本发明实施例中的照明体等同。图39是根据本发明第五实施例的照明控制系统的示意图,如图39所示,该系统包括:According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is also provided a lighting control system, the color tunable light source in this embodiment being equivalent to the illuminating body in the embodiment of the present invention. Figure 39 is a schematic illustration of a lighting control system in accordance with a fifth embodiment of the present invention, as shown in Figure 39, the system comprising:

传感器100、存储器200、控制器300和颜色可调光源400。Sensor 100, memory 200, controller 300, and color tunable light source 400.

传感器100用于获取目标物体的图像。The sensor 100 is used to acquire an image of a target object.

传感器100获取目标物体的图像有多种方式,常见的,传感器100为图像传感器,通过图像传感器拍摄目标物体的图像以获取目标物体的图像。 There are various ways for the sensor 100 to acquire an image of a target object. Typically, the sensor 100 is an image sensor, and an image of the target object is captured by the image sensor to acquire an image of the target object.

存储器200用于存储预设数据库。The memory 200 is used to store a preset database.

存储器200用于存储预设数据库,其中,预设数据库中包含多个预设数据库,多个预设数据库中包含第一预设数据库和第二预设数据库,第一预设数据库预存有对应于不同颜色参数的目标颜色样本,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据。The memory 200 is configured to store a preset database, where the preset database includes a plurality of preset databases, and the plurality of preset databases include a first preset database and a second preset database, where the first preset database is pre-stored corresponding to The target color samples of the different color parameters are pre-stored with the dimming signal data corresponding to the different target color samples.

具体地,可以以下方式得到第一预设数据库,将颜色色域分成若N份,其中,N大于1,取N份颜色样本代表这N种颜色,确定每个颜色样本的色调值和饱和度值,第一预设数据库用于存储各颜色样本和各颜色样本对应的色调值和饱和度值。Specifically, the first preset database may be obtained in the following manner, and the color gamut is divided into N parts, wherein N is greater than 1, and N color samples are taken to represent the N colors, and the hue value and saturation of each color sample are determined. The first preset database is used to store the hue value and the saturation value corresponding to each color sample and each color sample.

例如,将N取4进行举例说明,牛肉是代表颜色种类1的颜色样本,橙子是代表颜色种类1的颜色样本,金桔是代表颜色种类1的颜色样本,黄瓜是代表颜色种类1的颜色样本。各颜色样本在标准光源D65下的颜色被认为是该物体的真实颜色。各颜色样本的xy色坐标转为红(R)、绿(G)蓝(B)颜色三分值,再将对应的颜色三分量值转换为HSV值,将每个样本的色调值与饱和度值组成对应的向量(Hi,Si),如下表5所示:For example, taking N as 4 as an example, beef is a color sample representing color type 1, orange is a color sample representing color type 1, kumquat is a color sample representing color type 1, and cucumber is a color sample representing color type 1. . The color of each color sample under the standard light source D65 is considered to be the true color of the object. The xy color coordinates of each color sample are converted into red (R), green (G) blue (B) color three-point value, and the corresponding color three-component value is converted into HSV value, and the tone value and saturation of each sample are obtained. The values form the corresponding vector (Hi, Si) as shown in Table 5 below:

表5table 5

颜色样本Color sample (Hi,Si)(Hi, Si) 1(牛肉)1 (beef) (0.0105,0.6521)(0.0105, 0.6521) 2(橙子)2 (orange) (0.0854,0.5942)(0.0854, 0.5942) 3(金桔)3 (Kumquat) (0.172,0.3550)(0.172, 0.3550) 4(黄瓜)4 (cucumber) (0.3801,0.3338)(0.3801, 0.3338)

在该步骤中,得到第一预设数据库,以表5为例,得到表5中的颜色样本与饱和度值和色调值之间的对应关系。其中,牛肉、橙子、金桔和黄瓜在标准光源D65下的颜色被认为是该物体的真实颜色,代表不同的颜色种类。Hi和Si表示色调值和饱和度值。例如,通过表5获取到颜色样本与饱和度值和色调值之间的对应关系。根据该对应关系,通过目标物体的饱和度值和色调值即可查找到对应的颜色样本。In this step, a first preset database is obtained. Taking Table 5 as an example, the correspondence between the color samples in Table 5 and the saturation value and the tonal value is obtained. Among them, the color of beef, orange, kumquat and cucumber under the standard light source D65 is considered to be the true color of the object, representing different color types. Hi and Si represent tone values and saturation values. For example, the correspondence between the color sample and the saturation value and the tone value is obtained by Table 5. According to the correspondence relationship, the corresponding color sample can be found by the saturation value and the tonal value of the target object.

控制器300用于接收目标物体的图像,通过目标物体的图像,确定目标物体的颜色参数,在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本,在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光。The controller 300 is configured to receive an image of the target object, determine a color parameter of the target object by using an image of the target object, search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for a color sample in the second preset database. The corresponding dimming signal data is modulated to obtain the dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and the color adjustable light source is controlled by the light driving signal.

控制器300接收传感器100采集的目标物体的图像,对目标物体的图像进行处理,从而获取到目标物体的颜色参数。The controller 300 receives an image of the target object collected by the sensor 100, and processes the image of the target object to acquire the color parameter of the target object.

具体地,为了提升控制器300对目标物体的图像处理速度,对目标物体的图像进行处理可以通过以下方式:对目标物体的图像执行白平衡处理,经过白平衡处理,使得目标物体的图像不失真并且将目标图像的颜色还原正常。确定处理后的目标物体的图像中的目标区域,可以通过边缘检测技术或用户直接指定目标区域的方式确定目标区域。对标物体的图像中目标区域确定目标区域的主色彩,确定目标区域主色彩的颜 色分量值,将颜色分量值转换为色调值和饱和度值。Specifically, in order to improve the image processing speed of the target object by the controller 300, the image of the target object may be processed by performing white balance processing on the image of the target object, and performing white balance processing so that the image of the target object is not distorted. And the color of the target image is restored to normal. Determining the target area in the image of the processed target object may determine the target area by an edge detection technique or a manner in which the user directly specifies the target area. Determining the main color of the target area in the target area of the image of the target object, and determining the color of the main color of the target area A color component value that converts a color component value into a tone value and a saturation value.

具体地,可以通过以下方式确定目标区域的主色彩:获取目标物体的图像中的像素点,其中,像素点包括多个像素点;确定像素点的多个颜色向量,其中,多个颜色向量中不同的颜色向量对应多个像素点中不同的像素点;对多个颜色向量执行平均计算,得到平均向量;将平均向量确定为目标区域的主色彩。或者,可以通过以下方式确定目标区域的主色彩:获取目标物体的图像中的像素点,其中,像素点包括多个像素点;确定像素点的多个颜色向量,其中,多个颜色向量中不同的颜色向量对应多个像素点中不同的像素点;统计颜色向量在所有颜色向量中的比例;获取比例最高的颜色向量,将颜色向量确定为目标区域的主色彩。Specifically, the main color of the target area may be determined by: acquiring pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points; determining a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein, the plurality of color vectors Different color vectors correspond to different ones of the plurality of pixels; performing an averaging calculation on the plurality of color vectors to obtain an average vector; determining the average vector as the main color of the target area. Alternatively, the main color of the target area may be determined by: acquiring pixel points in the image of the target object, wherein the pixel points include a plurality of pixel points; determining a plurality of color vectors of the pixel points, wherein the plurality of color vectors are different The color vector corresponds to different pixel points of the plurality of pixels; the ratio of the statistical color vector in all the color vectors; the color vector with the highest ratio is obtained, and the color vector is determined as the main color of the target area.

控制器300还用于在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本,在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据。The controller 300 is further configured to search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, and search for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database.

优选地,为了在更加准确的在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本,本发明实施例提供的照明控制系统中,在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本包括:获取第一预设数据库,其中,第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数,颜色参数包括色调值和饱和度值;由第一预设数据库中的色调值和饱和度值组成向量集合,其中,向量集合包括多个向量,多个向量包括第一向量和第二向量,其中,向量集合包括多个向量,多个向量包括第一向量和第二向量;由目标物体的图像对应的色调值和饱和度值组成目标向量;获取目标向量与第一向量的第一距离;获取目标向量与第二向量的第二距离;判断第一距离是否小于第二距离;在第一距离是小于第二距离的情况下,获取第一向量中的色调值和饱和度值对应的第一颜色样本;将第一颜色样本确定为目标物体的图像对应的目标颜色样本;在第一距离是大于第二距离的情况下,获取第二向量中的色调值和饱和度值对应的第二颜色样本;将第二颜色样本确定为目标物体的图像对应的目标颜色样本。Preferably, in order to search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, the color control sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database in the illumination control system provided by the embodiment of the present invention includes: Obtaining a first preset database, wherein the first preset database prestores different color samples and color parameters corresponding to different color samples, the color parameters include a hue value and a saturation value; and the hue in the first preset database The value and saturation values constitute a vector set, wherein the vector set includes a plurality of vectors, the plurality of vectors including the first vector and the second vector, wherein the vector set includes a plurality of vectors, the plurality of vectors including the first vector and the second vector And forming a target vector by the tonal value and the saturation value corresponding to the image of the target object; acquiring a first distance between the target vector and the first vector; acquiring a second distance between the target vector and the second vector; determining whether the first distance is smaller than the second a distance; in the case where the first distance is less than the second distance, obtaining a pair of tonal values and saturation values in the first vector a first color sample; the first color sample is determined as a target color sample corresponding to the image of the target object; and in a case where the first distance is greater than the second distance, obtaining a hue value and a saturation value corresponding to the second vector a second color sample; the second color sample is determined as a target color sample corresponding to the image of the target object.

通过确定目标向量与向量集合中向量的最小距离,获取最小距离对应的向量集合中向量,将该向量中的色调值和饱和度值对应的颜色样本确定为目标颜色对应的颜色样本,通过该操作更加准确的查找到颜色参数对应的颜色样本。The vector in the vector set corresponding to the minimum distance is obtained by determining the minimum distance between the target vector and the vector in the vector set, and the color samples corresponding to the hue value and the saturation value in the vector are determined as the color samples corresponding to the target color, and the operation is performed. Find the color samples corresponding to the color parameters more accurately.

优选地,为了提升了增强目标物体颜色的处理速度,本发明实施例提供的照明控制系统中,在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据包括:在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同的颜色样本的调光信号数据。Preferably, in order to improve the processing speed of enhancing the color of the target object, in the illumination control system provided by the embodiment of the present invention, searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database includes: in the second preset database The dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is searched for, wherein the dimming signal data corresponding to the different color samples is pre-stored in the second preset database.

具体地,将上述确定的颜色样本输入第二预设数据库,获取第二预设数据库中颜色样本与调光信号数据之间的映射关系。通过该映射关系,获取颜色样本对应的调光信号数据。通过在第二预设数据库中直接查找到颜色样本对应的调光信号数据。不需要通过大量数据计算得到调光信号数据,此步骤提升了增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。Specifically, the determined color samples are input into the second preset database to obtain a mapping relationship between the color samples and the dimming signal data in the second preset database. The dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is obtained by the mapping relationship. The dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample is directly found in the second preset database. It is not necessary to calculate the dimming signal data through a large amount of data, and this step improves the processing speed of enhancing the color of the target object.

控制器300还用于对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号,通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光。The controller 300 is further configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal, and control the color adjustable light source to emit light through the light driving signal.

对查找到的颜色样本对应的调光信号数据进行调制,将调光信号数据转换为灯光驱动信号。通过上述获取到的灯光驱动信号控制光源发光,其中,灯光驱动信号用于控制光源发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。 The dimming signal data corresponding to the found color sample is modulated, and the dimming signal data is converted into a light driving signal. The light source is controlled by the light driving signal obtained by the above, wherein the light driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the light source to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object.

颜色可调光源400用于为目标物体提供光源。The color tunable light source 400 is used to provide a light source for the target object.

根据灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源400进行发光,该颜色可调光源400发出的灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。The color tunable light source 400 is controlled to emit light according to the light driving signal, and the light emitted by the color tunable light source 400 illuminates the target object to enhance the color of the target object.

本发明实施例提供的照明控制系统,通过传感器100获取目标物体的图像;存储器200存储预设数据库;颜色可调光源400为目标物体提供光源;控制器300接收目标物体的图像,通过目标物体的图像确定目标物体的颜色参数,在第一预设数据库中查找颜色参数对应的颜色样本,在第二预设数据库中查找与颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过灯光驱动信号控制颜色可调光源发光。在该照明控制系统中,控制器300通过颜色参数查找到对应的颜色样本;通过该颜色样本查找得到调光信号数据;通过该调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,该灯光驱动信号驱动颜色可调光源发出灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。不需要对采集到的目标物体参数通过大量计算得到调光信号数据,从而得到灯光驱动信号驱动颜色可调光源发出灯光照射目标物体以使目标物体的颜色得到增强。因此提升了自动识别目标物体的颜色来调节灯光以增强目标物体颜色的处理速度。The illumination control system provided by the embodiment of the present invention acquires an image of the target object through the sensor 100; the memory 200 stores a preset database; the color tunable light source 400 provides a light source for the target object; and the controller 300 receives the image of the target object through the target object. The image determines a color parameter of the target object, searches for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, searches for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample in the second preset database, and performs the dimmed signal data obtained by the finding Modulation, to obtain a light drive signal; control the color adjustable light source by the light drive signal. In the lighting control system, the controller 300 finds a corresponding color sample through a color parameter; obtains dimming signal data through the color sample search; obtains a light driving signal through the dimming signal data, and the light driving signal drives the color adjustable The light source emits light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. It is not necessary to obtain dimming signal data through a large number of calculations on the collected target object parameters, thereby obtaining a light driving signal to drive the color adjustable light source to emit light to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. Therefore, the processing speed of automatically recognizing the color of the target object to adjust the light to enhance the color of the target object is improved.

上述本发明实施例序号仅仅为了描述,不代表实施例的优劣。在本发明的上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。The serial numbers of the embodiments of the present invention are merely for the description, and do not represent the advantages and disadvantages of the embodiments. In the above-mentioned embodiments of the present invention, the descriptions of the various embodiments are different, and the parts that are not detailed in a certain embodiment can be referred to the related descriptions of other embodiments.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的技术内容,可通过其它的方式实现。其中,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如所述单元的划分,可以为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,单元或模块的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性或其它的形式。所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed technical contents may be implemented in other manners. The device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit may be a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, unit or module, and may be electrical or otherwise. The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.

另外,在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可为个人计算机、服务器或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software functional unit. The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention, which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. A number of instructions are included to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a Read-Only Memory (ROM), a Random Access Memory (RAM), a removable hard disk, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like. .

以上所述仅是本发明的优选实施方式,应当指出,对于本技术领域的普通技术人员来说,在不脱离本发明原理的前提下,还可以做出若干改进和润饰,这些改进和润饰也应视为本发明的保护范围。 The above description is only a preferred embodiment of the present invention, and it should be noted that those skilled in the art can also make several improvements and retouchings without departing from the principles of the present invention. It should be considered as the scope of protection of the present invention.

Claims (20)

一种照明控制方法,其特征在于,包括:A lighting control method, comprising: 获取照明体的调光信号;以及Obtaining a dimming signal of the illuminating body; 按照所述调光信号控制所述照明体发光。The illumination body is controlled to emit light according to the dimming signal. 根据权利要求1所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,获取照明体的调光信号包括:The illumination control method according to claim 1, wherein the acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: 接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型;Receiving a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectrum type of the illuminating body; 使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布;Detecting the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested by using a reflectance type of the surface of the object to be tested; 使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标,使用所述照明体光谱类型从所述存储器中查询得到所述照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,所述照明体为所述待测物提供可调色光源;Using the reference light source color temperature to query the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference light source color coordinate, and querying, by using the illuminant spectrum type, the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body. Wherein the illuminating body provides a tonable light source for the object to be tested; 根据所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和所述照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量;Generating a target flux according to the reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body ; 将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Converting the target radiant flux into a dimming signal for each color channel of the illuminator. 根据权利要求2所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,根据所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和所述照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量包括:The illumination control method according to claim 2, wherein the reference light source spectrum of the illumination body, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body are irradiated Flux calculation, obtaining the target radiation flux corresponding to the illuminating body includes: 通过计算获取所述待测物在所述参考光源下的色坐标;Obtaining a color coordinate of the object under test under the reference light source by calculation; 通过计算获取所述待测物在所述可调色光源下能达到的最大饱和度的色坐标;Obtaining a color coordinate of a maximum saturation that can be achieved by the object under the condensable light source by calculation; 根据所述待测物在参考光源下的色坐标、所述待测物在所述参考光源下能达到的最大饱和度色坐标、照明体各颜色通道光谱和用户输入的目标饱和度水平建立所述照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;Establishing a color coordinate according to the object under test at a reference light source, a maximum saturation color coordinate of the object to be tested under the reference light source, a spectrum of each color channel of the illumination body, and a target saturation level input by the user. a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; 根据所述照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出所述目标辐通量。The target radiant flux is calculated according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body. 根据权利要求1所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,获取照明体的调光信号包括:The illumination control method according to claim 1, wherein the acquiring the dimming signal of the illuminating body comprises: 接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d;Receiving an identification mark of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; 使用所述身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布;Using the identification mark to query the memory to obtain a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; 使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,所述照明体为所述待测物提供可调色光源;Using the reference source color temperature to query from the memory to obtain a reference source spectrum, a color coordinate of the reference source, and a color channel spectrum of the illuminator, wherein the illuminator provides a tonable light source for the object to be tested; 根据所述目标饱和度d、参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和所述照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应 的目标辐通量;Generating the illuminating body according to the target saturation d, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator. Target radiant flux; 将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。Converting the target radiant flux into a dimming signal for each color channel of the illuminator. 根据权利要求4所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,根据所述目标饱和度d、参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和所述照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量包括:The illumination control method according to claim 4, characterized in that, according to the target saturation d, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator Performing the radiant flux calculation to obtain the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body includes: 通过计算获取目标色坐标,其中,所述目标色坐标是所述待测物达到所述目标饱和度d时所呈现的色坐标;Acquiring a target color coordinate by calculation, wherein the target color coordinate is a color coordinate presented when the object to be tested reaches the target saturation d; 根据所述目标色坐标建立所述照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型;Establishing a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body according to the target color coordinate; 根据照明体对应的目标辐通量的计算模型计算出所述目标辐通量。The target radiant flux is calculated according to a calculation model of the target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body. 根据权利要求1所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,The lighting control method according to claim 1, wherein 获取照明体的调光信号包括:确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,所述目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,所述目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色;在预设数据库中查找与所述目标灯光色温值和所述目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,所述预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据,Obtaining the dimming signal of the illuminating body includes: determining a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color is a color that the target object needs to be enhanced; Searching for dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database prestores dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors, 按照所述调光信号控制所述照明体发光包括:对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过所述灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光照射所述目标物体以使所述目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制所述照明体发出的灯光的色温值为所述目标灯光的色温值。Controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal comprises: modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and controlling the illumination of the illumination body by the light driving signal, wherein the lighting driving signal is used for Controlling the light emitted by the illuminating body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object, and controlling a color temperature value of the light emitted by the illuminating body to be a color temperature value of the target light. 根据权利要求6所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,通过以下方式得到所述预设数据库:The illumination control method according to claim 6, wherein the preset database is obtained by: 创建优化方程,其中,所述优化方程用于计算辐通量,所述辐通量是表示所述照明体辐射强弱的物理量;Creating an optimization equation, wherein the optimization equation is used to calculate a radiant flux, the radiant flux being a physical quantity representing a radiation intensity of the illuminating body; 对所述优化方程执行计算处理,得到所述辐通量的最优解;Performing a calculation process on the optimization equation to obtain an optimal solution of the radiant flux; 根据所述辐通量的最优解,得到调光信号数据;以及Obtaining dimming signal data according to an optimal solution of the radiant flux; 创建预设数据库,其中,所述预设数据库用于存储所述调光信号数据。A preset database is created, wherein the preset database is used to store the dimming signal data. 根据权利要求7所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,通过以下方式创建所述优化方程:The illumination control method according to claim 7, wherein the optimization equation is created in the following manner: 创建目标方程,其中,所述目标方程是由标准光源的光谱、人眼三刺激值函数、标准漫反射体的反射率数据、目标颜色样本的反射率数据、所述照明体的相对光谱和所述辐通量创建的方程;Creating a target equation, wherein the target equation is a spectrum of a standard light source, a tristimulus value function of a human eye, a reflectance data of a standard diffuse reflector, a reflectance data of a target color sample, a relative spectrum of the illuminant, and a An equation created by the radiant flux; 创建约束方程,其中,所述约束方程是由所述标准光源的光谱、所述目标灯光色温值、所述人眼三刺激值函数、所述标准漫反射体的反射率数据、所述目标颜色样本的反射率数据、所述目标颜色样本的对比颜色样本的反射率数据、所述照明体的相对光谱和所述辐通量创建的方程;以及 Creating a constraint equation, wherein the constraint equation is a spectrum of the standard light source, the target light color temperature value, the human eye tristimulus value function, reflectivity data of the standard diffuse reflector, the target color The reflectance data of the sample, the reflectance data of the contrast color sample of the target color sample, the relative spectrum of the illuminant, and an equation created by the radiant flux; 通过所述目标方程和所述约束方程创建所述优化方程。The optimization equation is created by the target equation and the constraint equation. 根据权利要求1所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,The lighting control method according to claim 1, wherein 获取照明体的调光信号包括:获取目标物体的颜色参数;在第一预设数据库中查找目标颜色样本,其中,所述目标颜色样本为与所述颜色参数对应的颜色样本,其中,所述第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和所述不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数;在第二预设数据库中查找与所述目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,所述第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据;Obtaining a dimming signal of the illuminating body includes: acquiring a color parameter of the target object; searching for a target color sample in the first preset database, wherein the target color sample is a color sample corresponding to the color parameter, wherein the Different color samples and color parameters corresponding to the different color samples are prestored in the first preset database; and dimming signal data corresponding to the target color samples is searched in the second preset database, wherein the Two dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples are pre-stored in the preset database; 按照所述调光信号控制所述照明体发光包括:对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过所述灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光照射所述目标物体以使所述目标物体的颜色得到增强。Controlling the illumination of the illumination body according to the dimming signal comprises: modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and controlling the illumination of the illumination body by the light driving signal, wherein the lighting driving signal is used for Controlling the light emitted by the illuminating body to illuminate the target object to enhance the color of the target object. 根据权利要求9所述的照明控制方法,其特征在于,通过以下方式获取所述目标物体的所述颜色参数,其中,所述颜色参数包括多个颜色参数,所述多个颜色参数包括色调值和饱和度值:The illumination control method according to claim 9, wherein the color parameter of the target object is acquired by: wherein the color parameter comprises a plurality of color parameters, the plurality of color parameters including a tone value And saturation values: 获取所述目标物体的图像;Obtaining an image of the target object; 对所述目标物体的图像执行白平衡处理,获取处理后的目标物体的图像;Performing white balance processing on the image of the target object to acquire an image of the processed target object; 确定所述处理后的目标物体的图像中的目标区域;Determining a target area in the image of the processed target object; 确定所述目标区域的主色彩;Determining a primary color of the target area; 确定所述目标区域主色彩的颜色分量值;以及Determining a color component value of a primary color of the target area; 将所述颜色分量值转换为色调值和饱和度值。The color component values are converted to a hue value and a saturation value. 一种照明控制装置,其特征在于,包括:A lighting control device, comprising: 获取总模块,用于获取照明体的调光信号;以及Obtaining a total module for obtaining a dimming signal of the illuminating body; 控制总模块,用于按照所述调光信号控制所述照明体发光。And a control total module, configured to control the illumination body to emit light according to the dimming signal. 根据权利要求11所述的照明控制装置,其特征在于,所述获取总模块包括:The lighting control apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the acquisition total module comprises: 接收模块,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和照明体光谱类型;a receiving module, configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectrum type of the illuminating body; 查询模块,用于使用待测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布;a query module, configured to query, by using a reflectivity type of a surface of the object to be tested, a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested from a memory; 所述查询模块还用于使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标,使用所述照明体光谱类型从所述存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,所述照明体为所述待测物提供可调色光源;The query module is further configured to query, by using the reference light source color temperature, the reference light source spectrum and the reference light source color coordinate of the illuminating body from the memory, and query the illuminating body from the memory by using the illuminating body spectral type Each color channel spectrum, wherein the illuminating body provides a tonable light source for the object to be tested; 计算模块,用于根据所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布光谱和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明 体对应的目标辐通量;a calculation module, configured to perform a radiant flux calculation according to a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference source color coordinate, a reflectance distribution spectrum of the surface of the object to be tested, and a spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, to obtain the illumination The target radiant flux corresponding to the body; 转换模块,用于将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。And a conversion module, configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body. 根据权利要求11所述的照明控制装置,其特征在于,所述获取总模块包括:The lighting control apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the acquisition total module comprises: 接收模块,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d;a receiving module, configured to receive an identifier of the object to be detected detected by the sensor, and a reference source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user; 查询模块,用于使用所述身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布;a query module, configured to query, from the memory, the reflectivity distribution of the surface of the object to be tested by using the identifier; 所述查询模块还用于使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,其中,所述照明体为所述待测物提供可调色光源;The query module is further configured to query, by using the reference source color temperature, the reference source spectrum, the color coordinates of the reference source, and the color channel spectrum of the illuminator, wherein the illuminant provides the object to be tested Colorable light source; 计算模块,根据所述目标饱和度d、所述参考光源光谱、参考光源的色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量;a calculation module, according to the target saturation d, the reference light source spectrum, the color coordinate of the reference light source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, the radiant flux calculation is performed, and the illuminating body correspondingly is obtained. Target radiant flux; 转换模块,用于将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号。And a conversion module, configured to convert the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminating body. 根据权利要求11所述的照明控制装置,其特征在于,所述获取总模块包括:The lighting control apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the acquisition total module comprises: 所述获取总模块包括:确定单元,用于确定目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,所述目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,所述目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色;查找单元,用于在预设数据库中查找与所述目标灯光色温值和所述目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,其中,所述预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据,The obtaining total module includes: a determining unit, configured to determine a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, and the target color refers to a color that the target object needs to be enhanced; a unit, configured to search, in a preset database, dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, wherein the preset database pre-stores a tone corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors Optical signal data, 所述控制总模块包括:获取单元,用于由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号;控制单元,用于根据所述灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制所述照明体发出的灯光的色温值为所述目标灯光的色温值。The control module includes: an obtaining unit, configured to obtain a light driving signal from the obtained dimming signal data; and a control unit configured to control the illuminating body illuminating according to the light driving signal, wherein the light driving signal is used for Controlling the light emitted by the illuminating body to enhance the target color of the target object, and controlling the color temperature value of the light emitted by the illuminating body to be a color temperature value of the target light. 根据权利要求11所述的照明控制装置,其特征在于,The lighting control device according to claim 11, wherein 所述获取总模块包括:第一获取单元,用于获取目标物体的颜色参数;第一查找单元,用于在第一预设数据库中查找所述颜色参数对应的目标颜色样本,其中,所述第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和所述不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数;第二查找单元,用于第二预设数据库中查找与所述目标颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,其中,所述第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同目标颜色样本的调光信号数据;The acquiring the total module includes: a first acquiring unit, configured to acquire a color parameter of the target object; and a first searching unit, configured to search, in the first preset database, a target color sample corresponding to the color parameter, where the The first preset database prestores different color samples and color parameters corresponding to the different color samples; the second searching unit is configured to search for dimming signal data corresponding to the target color sample in the second preset database. The dimming signal data corresponding to different target color samples is pre-stored in the second preset database; 所述控制总模块包括:第二获取单元,用于对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;控制单元,用于所述灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光照射所述目标物体以使所述目标物体的目标颜色得到增强。The control module includes: a second acquiring unit, configured to modulate the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; and a control unit configured to control the illuminating body to emit light, wherein the light The driving signal is used to control the light emitted by the illuminating body to illuminate the target object to enhance the target color of the target object. 一种照明控制系统,其特征在于,包括: A lighting control system, comprising: 照明体;以及Illumination body; 总控制器,用于获取所述照明体的调光信号,并按照所述调光信号控制所述照明体发光。And a total controller, configured to acquire a dimming signal of the illuminating body, and control the illuminating body to emit light according to the dimming signal. 根据权利要求16所述的照明控制系统,其特征在于,所述总控制器中包括:The lighting control system of claim 16 wherein said total controller comprises: 存储器,用于存储照明体各颜色通道光谱、所述照明体的参考光源光谱、所述参考光源色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;a memory for storing a spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, a reference source spectrum of the illuminating body, a color coordinate of the reference source, and a reflectance distribution spectrum of a surface of the object to be tested; 控制器,用于接收用户输入的参考光源色温、待测物表面的反射率类型和所述照明体光谱类型,使用测物表面的反射率类型从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布光谱;使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到所述照明体的参考光源、参考光源色坐标,使用所述照明体光谱类型从所述存储器中查询得到照明体各颜色通道光谱,根据所述参考光源、参考光源色坐标、所述待测物表面的反射率分布和所述照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量;将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体提供的各个颜色通道的调光信号,其中,所述照明体用于为所述待测物提供可调色光源。a controller, configured to receive a reference light source color temperature input by the user, a reflectivity type of the surface of the object to be tested, and a type of the illuminating body spectrum, and use the reflectivity type of the surface of the object to query the surface of the object to be tested Rate distribution spectrum; using the reference source color temperature to query the reference light source of the illuminant, the reference source color coordinates, and querying the color channel spectrum of the illuminator from the memory by using the illuminant spectrum type And performing a radiant flux calculation according to the reference light source, the reference source color coordinate, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminating body, to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; The target radiant flux is converted into a dimming signal of each color channel provided by the illuminating body, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested. 根据权利要求16所述的照明控制系统,其特征在于,所述总控制器中包括:The lighting control system of claim 16 wherein said total controller comprises: 存储器,用于存储照明体各颜色通道光谱、照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和待测物表面的反射率分布;a memory for storing a spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator, a reference source spectrum of the illuminating body, a spectral color coordinate of the reference source, and a reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested; 传感器,用于通过感应将身份识别标志传送给控制器,其中,所述身份识别标志关联待测物;a sensor, configured to transmit an identification mark to the controller by sensing, wherein the identification mark is associated with the object to be tested; 控制器,用于接收传感器检测到的待测物的身份识别标志,以及用户输入的参考光源色温和目标饱和度d使用所述身份识别标志从存储器中查询得到所述待测物表面的反射率分布;使用所述参考光源色温从所述存储器中查询得到照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标和照明体各颜色通道光谱,根据所述目标饱和度d、所述照明体的参考光源光谱、参考光源光谱色坐标、待测物表面的反射率分布和照明体各颜色通道光谱进行辐通量计算,得到所述照明体对应的目标辐通量;将所述目标辐通量转化成所述照明体各颜色通道的调光信号,其中,所述照明体用于为所述待测物提供可调色光源。a controller, configured to receive an identification identifier of the object to be tested detected by the sensor, and a reference light source color temperature and a target saturation d input by the user, using the identification identifier to query the reflectivity of the surface of the object to be tested from the memory a reference light source spectrum of the illuminating body, a reference light source spectral color coordinate, and a illuminating body color channel spectrum are obtained by using the reference light source color temperature, according to the target saturation d, the reference source of the illuminating body Generating the flux of the spectrum, the spectral color coordinate of the reference source, the reflectance distribution of the surface of the object to be tested, and the spectrum of each color channel of the illuminator to obtain a target radiant flux corresponding to the illuminating body; converting the target radiant flux into a dimming signal of each color channel of the illuminator, wherein the illuminating body is configured to provide a tonable light source for the object to be tested. 根据权利要求16所述的照明控制系统,其特征在于,所述总控制器中包括:The lighting control system of claim 16 wherein said total controller comprises: 存储器,用于存储预设数据库,其中,所述预设数据库中预存有对应于不同灯光色温值和不同颜色的调光信号数据;a memory for storing a preset database, wherein the preset database has pre-stored dimming signal data corresponding to different light color temperature values and different colors; 控制器,用于接收目标灯光色温值和目标颜色,其中,所述目标灯光色温值是目标灯光的色温值,所述目标颜色是指目标物体需要增强的颜色,在所述预设数据库中查找与所述目标灯光色温值和所述目标颜色对应的调光信号数据,由查找得到的调光信号数据得到灯光驱动信号,通过所述灯光驱动信号控制所述照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光使得目标物体的目标颜色得到增强,并控制所述照明体发出的灯光的色温值为所述目标灯光的色温值,其中,所述照明体用于为所述目标物体提供光源。a controller, configured to receive a target light color temperature value and a target color, wherein the target light color temperature value is a color temperature value of the target light, the target color refers to a color that the target object needs to be enhanced, and the target database is searched for And the dimming signal data corresponding to the target light color temperature value and the target color, the light driving signal is obtained from the obtained dimming signal data, and the lighting body is controlled to emit light by the light driving signal, wherein the light The driving signal is used for controlling the light emitted by the illuminating body to enhance the target color of the target object, and controlling the color temperature value of the light emitted by the illuminating body to be a color temperature value of the target light, wherein the illuminating body is used for A light source is provided for the target object. 根据权利要求16所述的照明控制系统,其特征在于,所述总控制器中包括: The lighting control system of claim 16 wherein said total controller comprises: 传感器,用于获取目标物体的图像;a sensor for acquiring an image of a target object; 存储器,用于存储预设数据库,其中,所述预设数据库中包含多个预设数据库,多个预设数据库中包含第一预设数据库和第二预设数据库,所述第一预设数据库中预存有不同的颜色样本和所述不同的颜色样本对应的颜色参数,所述第二预设数据库中预存有对应于不同颜色样本的调光信号数据;The storage is configured to store a preset database, where the preset database includes a plurality of preset databases, where the plurality of preset databases include a first preset database and a second preset database, and the first preset database Different color samples and color parameters corresponding to the different color samples are prestored, and dimming signal data corresponding to different color samples are pre-stored in the second preset database; 控制器,用于接收目标物体的图像,通过所述目标物体的图像,确定目标物体的颜色参数,在第一预设数据库中查找所述颜色参数对应的颜色样本,在第二预设数据库中查找与所述颜色样本对应的调光信号数据,对查找得到的调光信号数据进行调制,得到灯光驱动信号;通过所述灯光驱动信号控制照明体发光,其中,所述灯光驱动信号用于控制所述照明体发出的灯光照射所述目标物体以使所述目标物体的颜色得到增强,其中,所述照明体用于为所述目标物体提供光源。 a controller, configured to receive an image of the target object, determine a color parameter of the target object by using an image of the target object, and search for a color sample corresponding to the color parameter in the first preset database, in the second preset database Searching for the dimming signal data corresponding to the color sample, modulating the obtained dimming signal data to obtain a light driving signal; controlling the illuminating body illumination by the light driving signal, wherein the lighting driving signal is used for controlling The light emitted by the illuminating body illuminates the target object to enhance the color of the target object, wherein the illuminating body is used to provide a light source for the target object.
PCT/CN2015/086676 2014-11-12 2015-08-11 Illumination control method, device, and system Ceased WO2016074512A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201410634807.0A CN104486861B (en) 2014-11-12 2014-11-12 Light control method, device and system
CN201410634807.0 2014-11-12
CN201410635471.XA CN104486862B (en) 2014-11-12 2014-11-12 Illumination control method, apparatus and system
CN201410635471.X 2014-11-12
CN201410666024.0A CN104703335B (en) 2014-11-19 2014-11-19 The method of Lighting control, apparatus and system
CN201410665789.2A CN104703334B (en) 2014-11-19 2014-11-19 The method of Lighting control, apparatus and system
CN201410666024.0 2014-11-19
CN201410665789.2 2014-11-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016074512A1 true WO2016074512A1 (en) 2016-05-19

Family

ID=55953709

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2015/086676 Ceased WO2016074512A1 (en) 2014-11-12 2015-08-11 Illumination control method, device, and system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016074512A1 (en)

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009156244A2 (en) * 2008-06-24 2009-12-30 Osram Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung Circuit for dimming a lamp and associated method
CN102573221A (en) * 2010-12-21 2012-07-11 夏普株式会社 LED drive circuit and LED illumination component using the same
CN102858072A (en) * 2012-09-28 2013-01-02 北京半导体照明科技促进中心 Lighting control method and system
CN103124459A (en) * 2013-01-04 2013-05-29 安提亚科技股份有限公司 Light modulation method and device capable of adjusting color and brightness and lighting system
CN203104900U (en) * 2013-01-31 2013-07-31 北京半导体照明科技促进中心 Lighting control equipment and lighting systems
CN104486861A (en) * 2014-11-12 2015-04-01 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Light control method, device and system
CN104486862A (en) * 2014-11-12 2015-04-01 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Lighting control method, device and system
CN104703334A (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-06-10 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Illumination control method, device and system
CN104703335A (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-06-10 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Illumination control method, device and system

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009156244A2 (en) * 2008-06-24 2009-12-30 Osram Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung Circuit for dimming a lamp and associated method
CN102573221A (en) * 2010-12-21 2012-07-11 夏普株式会社 LED drive circuit and LED illumination component using the same
CN102858072A (en) * 2012-09-28 2013-01-02 北京半导体照明科技促进中心 Lighting control method and system
CN103124459A (en) * 2013-01-04 2013-05-29 安提亚科技股份有限公司 Light modulation method and device capable of adjusting color and brightness and lighting system
CN203104900U (en) * 2013-01-31 2013-07-31 北京半导体照明科技促进中心 Lighting control equipment and lighting systems
CN104486861A (en) * 2014-11-12 2015-04-01 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Light control method, device and system
CN104486862A (en) * 2014-11-12 2015-04-01 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Lighting control method, device and system
CN104703334A (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-06-10 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Illumination control method, device and system
CN104703335A (en) * 2014-11-19 2015-06-10 常州市武进区半导体照明应用技术研究院 Illumination control method, device and system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20190172415A1 (en) Remote Color Matching Process and System
JP4198599B2 (en) Color control for LED-based light emitters
US20140132827A1 (en) Control apparatus and illumination apparatus
Smet et al. Colour appearance rating of familiar real objects
CN110945561B (en) Hyperspectral Imaging Spectrophotometers and Systems
CN104486861B (en) Light control method, device and system
CN110231148B (en) A method and system for evaluating the color rendering of an exhibition light source for color resolution
CN119183224B (en) A light source control system for adaptive adjustment of multi-primary color LEDs without phosphors
KR20220049582A (en) Systems for Characterizing Ambient Lighting
CN104703334B (en) The method of Lighting control, apparatus and system
CN105136432A (en) LED lighting quality evaluation method based on objective and subjective experiment data and system
CN103108469A (en) Method and device for controlling output light of illuminating device and illuminating system
David et al. Methods for assessing quantity and quality of illumination
Hanlon et al. Dermoscopy and skin imaging light sources: a comparison and review of spectral power distribution and color consistency
US9992842B2 (en) Illumination system and method for developing target visual perception of an object
CN104703335B (en) The method of Lighting control, apparatus and system
CN105825020B (en) Three-dimensional can perceive colour gamut calculation method
WO2016074512A1 (en) Illumination control method, device, and system
Geisler-Moroder et al. Color-rendering indices in global illumination methods
US9980338B2 (en) Illumination system
JP2007086549A (en) Image display device and image display method
GB2377755A (en) Colour temperature calculation
US20130057680A1 (en) System and method for measuring a colour value of a target
CN117279158A (en) Multispectral light source parameter optimization method, device, equipment and storage medium
US20250265959A1 (en) Color measuring and color adjusting device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15858921

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15858921

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1